The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About7838 Gall Blvd (2)-I II --• -III- il, --- •I• II II - I I I I E SEE SHT,S-1FOR TYP, REINFORCING TO EXTEND FROM FTGS TO IVERTICAL REINFG SIZE AND ROOF OR PARAPET BEAM AS REQ'D, a SPACING. PROVIDE HOOKED AT MASONRY OPENING LOCATIONS, I DOWELS AT FTGS AND IIE REINFG TO EXTEND FROM LINTEL TO ROOF t BEAMS. OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. HOOK REINFG I a TO FTG AND BEAM STEEL AT TERMINATIONS. I I711 ALTERNATE INTERLOCKING I MASONRY BLDCK COURSES HORIZONTAL JOINT REINF. (9 GAGE) LADDER TYPE @ 16" O.C. (VERT.) r_1 CORNER WALL DETAIL S-] SCALE: 3/' = 1'_01' REINFORCING TO EXTEND FROM FTGS TO ROOF OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. AT MASONRY OPENING LOCATIONS, HORIZONTAL JOINT REINF.(9 GAGE) REINFG TO EXTEND FROM LINTEL TO ROOF LADDER TYPE @ 16" O.C. (VERT.) OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. HOOK REINFG TO FTG AND BEAM STEEL AT TERMINATIONS. -I- - - - - - -,- - - F_ - - I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I w } PLACE MASONRY IN A RUNNING ~ SEE SHT.S-1 FOR TYP. VERTICAL BOND PATTERN (TYP,) WALL REINFG SIZE AND SPACING. 4 TYPICAL WALL DETAIL �-7 SCALE: 3/"= 1'-0" STEEL JOIST %z" DIA. BOLTED CONNECTION AS SHOWN; TACK WELD 311x311x1/411 @ 5'-01, O.C. (MAX,) OR 1/2" DIA. x 8" LONG HANGING BOLTED CONNECTION, WHEN CHANNEL IS AT BOTTOM OF JOIST ELEVATION. �� ♦ �� C4x5,4 WITH SLOTTED HOLES. i NOTE. CHANNEL MAY BE INVERTED i TO AVOID INSET OF STUD TRACK, i STUDS (SEE ARCH.OETAILS) ��--"-��` /♦ 18 GAGE STRAP @ 48" D.C. (MAX.) OVER CHANNEL W/ (6) #10 SREWS ` 3�, 7 (3 E.S.) INTO STUD / `� M�! PROVIDE CONT. LATERAL BRACING BETWEEN STUDS ABOVE THE LOCATION OF THE KICKER. 1 : I 1 I I i I 1 I I KICKER BACK TO JOIST BOTTOM l o CHORD OR ADJACENT STUD WALL @ 48' D.C. MIN. (MATCH STUD SIZE LIGHT GAGE AND GAGE) ` STUDS (3) #10 SCREWS 40 SEE ARCH, DETAILS SOFFIT DETAIL (PARALLEL TO ROOF JOISTS) NO SCALE STOP NR 2" BELO COURSE L f � z Q w � U ONLY USE MAX POUR HEIGHT H WHERE CLEAN -OUTS CAN BE w o HIDDEN FROM INTERIOR AND = ? EXTERIOR VIEW. (I.E. BELOW 3 GRADE OR EXTERIOR FINISH) 2 . _ x CD w z = CD MASONRY REINFORCEMENT LAP REQUIREMENTS: 115 = 32" (FOR FBC, USE 30") 116 = 52" (FOR FBC, USE 36') 117 = 61" (FOR FBC, USE 42") FBC LENGTHS ARE FOR FLORIDA ONLY. 0 3"x3" (MIN.) CLEAN -OUT X HOLE.REMOVE ALL OVERHANG MORTAR AND DEBRIS FROM STD ACI HOOK WITHIN CELL TO BE FILLED TOP OF FND. D D O � D D D D D 0 0 o o o • D D D D D • NOTES: 1. SEE PLANS, SECTIONS AND NOTES FOR LOCATION(S) OF FILLED CELLS AND FOR REINFORCING. 2, CONCRETE FOR FILLED CELLS. STRENGTH = 3000 PSI MIN.@ 28 DAYS (NO FLY ASH) MAX. AGGREGATE SIZE. T8" (PEA GRAVEL) SLUMP = 9" 4/- 1" SUBMIT MIX DESIGN FOR REVIEW BY THE ENGINEER. DO NOT USE THE SAME MIX DESIGN AS FOR OTHER CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. 3. ALLOW MORTAR TO SET, 24 HOURS MINIMUM, PRIOR TO COMMENCING GROUTING MASONRY LIFT DETAIL SCALE. l 11 ALTERNATE INTERLOCKING I� MASONRY BLOCK COURSES I I I I i I VERT. REINFORCING TO EXTEND FROM FTGS TO • • I iF i ROOF OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. AT MASONRY OPENING LOCATIONS, I I I R R F T EXTEND FROM LINTEL T R I I I VE T. EIN G O E E LI EL 0 0 4 I - R PARAPET BEAM AS Rt0'D. HOOK REINF IEl i - -- -- 0 E B G T FT AN BEAM STEEL AT TERMINATIONS. I I 0 G D B E L - - - - - SEE SHT. S-1 FOR TYP. VERTICAL REINFG SIZE AND SPACING. PROVIDE HOOKED DOWELS AT FTGS AND TIE HORIZONTAL JOINT REINF.(9 GAGE) BEAMS. LADDER TYPE @ 16" O.C. (VERT.) TYPe INTERSECTING WALL DETAIL SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0' REINFORCING TO EXTEND FROM FTGS TO - - -I - - - - - - - -I - ROOF OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. • I I AT MASONRY OPENING LOCATIONS, I REINFG TO EXTEND FROM LINTEL TO ROOF OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. HOOK REINFG I • TO FTG AND BEAM STEEL AT TERMINATIONS. SEE SHT. S-1 FOR TYP, VERTICAL REINFG SIZE AND SPACING.PROVIDE HOOKED DOWELS AT FTGS AND TIE BEAMS. TYP MASONRY OPENING DETAIL SCALE: 3/" = 1'-0" SEE 1/5-7 FOR STRAP ATTACHMENT REQUIREMENTS. STEEL JOIST %Z" DIA, BOLT @ EACH JOIST (TYP. 1 ONLY WHEN THERE IS A CONFLICT I C4x5.4 WITH SLOTTED HOLES. WITH A PANEL POINT, A TACK WELD I NOTE. CHANNEL MAY BE INVERTED ON EACH SIDE OF THE CHANNEL MAY I TO AVOID INSET OF STUD TRACK. BE SUBSTITUTED FOR THE BOLT. I 1 1 30- MIM STUDS (SEE ARCH. DETAILS) 1 I JOIST I PROVIDE CONT.LATERAL BRACING I BETWEEN STUDS ABOVE THE I I LOCATION OF THE KICKER, 1 7/77,7777,777/7 I KICKER BACK TO JOIST BOTTOM 1 I CHORD AT EACH JOIST LOCATION, i MAXIMUM SPACING @ 6'-0" O.C. 1 I I �o (MATCH STUD SIZE AND GAGE) I j (3) 1110 SCREWS I CHANNEL I SEE ARCH, DETAILS 1p SOFFIT DETAIL 7"' (PERPENDICULAR TO ROOF JOISTS) - NO SCALE )NRY COL 1T W/ 2 -ILL WITH VERTICAL -MENT SPACED PER )WEL INTO HEADER WALL FOOTING. LL WALL FIb REINFG /"1P'1A Il_1%T !"1I"1rA ITA In I-1rT A TI SCALE. 1/4" = 1'-0' w CD PE c� HSS COLUMN `" 0 ti JOIST Y8' BENT PLATE EACH FACE (WELD TO COLUMN) w 0 o' rn 0 IIIIask PRE -NOTCHED CONIC MASONRY OFFSET CONTROL BLK.TYP. AT CONTROL JOINTS JOINT TO END OF RUBBER CONTROL JOINT HEADER -WHEN WITH BACKER ROD AO,IACENT TO OR AND SEALANT -0VER AN OPENING. I .a IN •. ♦• Oil ►♦i! ��♦�♦:e�2♦ �i♦i �Oi !♦!♦!♦'�'�!i!♦!�!�!�'s!i°�il!�!�!♦!�2,'i�i!i'i!i�i!D_i ►i ��ih�i♦i ►i 'Oi''Oi ►i ►i �♦i �♦i ♦♦� ►� �♦� �:t:�:�:�:�:�: CONTROL JOINTS DONOI EXTEND THRU TIE BEAMS, (2) #7 IN FILL CELLS BOND BEAMS OR HEADERS. (1 EACH FACE OF CELL) DO NOT PLACE C.J. OVER ZTYP CONC. MASONRY BLOCK OPENINGS. -� TYP e MASONRY CONTROL JOINT SCALE: 3/" 12" BLK. WALL PROVIDE 12'x14" MIN. BEAM AT EXTERIOR DOOR OPENINGS. #3 TIES AT 12' Q.C. (6'-O' MAX. SPAN) 4' TO 31/2" CONC, SLAB W/#5 AT 6" TOP AND 115 AT W BOT. (TRANS). 0 2 #5 #5 AT 6" O.C. 2 #5 °� SEE ELEVATIONS cn 3/"DRIP 2'-m° II EXTEND EYEBROW AND HEADER METAL DOOR FRAME MIN. 8" BEYOND DOOR OPNG. SEE SHT A-2 6 ONCRETE EYEBROW S-] JSCALE: 3/" = Y-0" ,jmk TOP/COLUMN = 23'-0" BOT/CHANNELS = 15'-6" (VERIFY) VU 11VU, I-IJ JVIILUULLU. I^\ II 2,-6,1 11/Z" DIA., SCH. 40 PIPE (1.9" D.D.) FOR MUSAK DISH I II WELD CAPS AT ENDS TS 5x3x3/16 OF PIPE/TUBE,(TYP) II PROVIDE (2) 1" I.D. PIPE FOR CABLE ACCESS, BEND DOWN ANGLE BEARING ON JOIST WELD TO JOIST TOP OF JOIST JOIST L 4"x4"x3/8" FRAMED 13A 4' DIA„ SCH 40 PIPE AROUND PIPE COLUMN. SHALL BE WELDED ALL S _ ] AROUND TO ANGLE SUPPORTS. 13 DISH FRAMING PLAN L3x3xl/4 BETWEEN BOTTOM CHORD OF ADJACENT JOISTS. WELD TO JOIST AT EACH END AND TO COLUMN AS SHOWN. ANGE CHANNELS. NI-16-P8 TO EACH SIDE FOR WINDOW HEADER, 12 SECTION S-] SCALE: 1" = 1'-O" A 1 � 0 \� I I \ 2'- 6' I I I I 1 2%z" DIA„ SCH, 40 PIPE (2.875" O.D.) FOR I �@ LOTTO DISH I PAINT ALL EXPOSED STEEL WITH 1 RUST INHIBITING PAINT. I I - r� N �I- PIPE SHALL BE WELDED ALL AROUND TO SUPPORT. (TYP) ,I PUDDLE WELD METAL DECK TO ANGLES. cli III ; III GIST ICI II L 4"x4"x3/8' WELD TO ANGLE III 4" DIA. SCH. 40 PIPE (OD=4.59 I I 1 4- HSS COLUMN I BEYOND I�I ICI I I , %" BENT STL PLATE WELD TO COLUMN & STL PIPE 3A"STL BOTTOM PLATE I FULL WELD CUT TO FIT 3/g" STL PLATE EACH FACE (WELD TO COL) GENERAL NOTES DESIGN LOADS 1. DEAD LOADS, LIVE LOADS AND WIND LOADS ARE SPECIFIED ON THE PLAN SHEETS. 2. THIS STRUCTURE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO COMPLY WITH LATEST EDITION OF THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE AND STANDARD BUILDING CODE. CONSTRUCTION SAFETY T SATISFY SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR 1. THESEDRAWINGS DO NOT INCLUDE PROVISIONS 0 S IS S I IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION, AND FOR CONFORMANCE TO ALL APPLICABLE OSHA STANDARDS. JOBSITE VISITS BY ENGINEER/PUBLIX REP. SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE APPROVAL, AWARENESS OR LIABILITY FOR HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS. 2. DO NOT OVERLOAD ONE SEGMENT OR SPAN OF A BEAM CONTINUOUS OVER SEVERAL SUPPORTS. BEAMS SHOULD BE LOADED AS GRADUALLY AND EVENLY AS POSSIBLE UNTIL THE FULL LOAD IS IN PLACE. 3. ERECTION SEQUENCE SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE .CONTRACTOR, AND SHALL NOT CAUSE OVERSTRESS OR EXCESSIVE DEFORMATION OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. 4. NO PROVISION HAS BEEN MADE IN THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR TEMPORARY CONDITIONS OCCURING DURING CONSTRUCTION, UNLESS NOTED SPECIFICALLY ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY SHORING AND BRACING REQUIRED TO RESIST STRESSES OR INSTABILITY OCCURING FROM ANY CAUSE DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSUME COMPLETE RESPONSIBILTY FOR SUCH MEASURES, 5. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1.00 NOT SCALE THESE DRAWINGS FOR DIMENSIONS NOT GIVEN. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM NO PORTION OF THE WORK AT ANY TIME WITHOUT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR, WHERE REQUIRED, APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS. 3. THESE GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES ARE INTENDED TO EMPHASIZE CERTAIN INFORMATION MORE COMPLETELY DISCUSSED IN THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS (PM SHEETS), THE CONTRACTOR SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE REQUIREMENTS AS STATED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. FOUNDATIONS 1. FOUNDATION DESIGNED FOR THE SOIL BEARING PRESSURE AS DESCRIBED IN THE DESIGN CRITERIA. IF CONDITIONS AT THE SITE DO NOT PROVIDE THIS MINIMUM VALUE, NOTIFY PUBLIX STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY. 2. FOUNDATION SIZES SHALL NOT BE REDUCED FOR ANY REASON,EVEN IF HIGHER SOIL BEARING VALUES ARE ACHIEVED, 3. TOP OF ALL FOOTINGS TO BE A MINIMUM OF 24" BELOW FINISHED FLOOR. 4. PUBLIX REQUIRES THAT MAXIMUM TOTAL SOIL SETTLEMENTS NOT EXCEED 3/"AND MAXIMUM DIFFERENTIAL SOIL SETTLEMENTS NOT EXCEED 5, PUBLIX REQUIRES SOIL COMPACTION OF 95Y OF MODIFIED PROCTOR OR 98% OF STANDARD PROCTOR, REFER TO SITE SPECIFIC GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FOR MORE INFORMATION. REINFORCED CONCRETE 1. CONCRETE MATERIALS, MIXING AND WORKMANSHIP SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH GOOD ENGINEERING PRACTICES AND SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST EDITIONS OF ACI 301, ACI 318 AND ASTM C-94. 2. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A615; YIELD STRENGTH = 60 KSI, MINIMUM. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT REINFORCEMENT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO POURING. PUBLIX MIX DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: NO CEMENT REPLACEMENT(I.E. FLY ASH), 500 LBS. MIN CEMENT MAX. W/C RATIOS. 0.58 FOR 3000 PSI, 0.44 FOR 4000 PSI. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COPIES OF ALL STRUCTURAL CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TEST RESULTS TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR REVIEW. ALSO,CONTRACTOR TO HAVE COPIES OF CONCRETE TEST REPORTS AVAILABLE ON SITE. G. FOR READY -MIX CONCRETE, THE MAXIMUM TIME PERMITTED BETWEEN BATCHING AND DEPOSITING IN THE FORMS IS 90 MINUTES. CONCRETE EXCEEDING THE ABOVE SHALL BE REJECTED. 7. THE ADDITION OF WATER AT THE SITE TO INCREASE CONCRETE SLUMP SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED AND SHALL BE JUST CAUSE FOR REJECTION OF THAT BATCH OF CONCRETE. 8. MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER TO REINFORCING STEEL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. CAST AGAINST EARTH = 3' EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER = 1%2" BEAMS AND COLUMNS = 12" 9. ALL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE SECURELY HELD IN PLACE BY STANDARD ACCESSORIES DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT. 10. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM LAP SPLICES: 114=29", 115=36", #6=43" #7=63', 118=72" FOR ALL REINFORCING BARS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. DO NOT SPLICE TIE BEAM REINFORCEMENT OVER OPENINGS. DO NOT SPLICE FOOTING REINFORCEMENT UNDER OPENINGS. 11.IN WALL FOOTINGS, CONCRETE BEAMS AND BOND BEAMS,PROVIDE BENT BARS AT CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS OF THE SAME NUMBER AND SIZE AS THE STRAIGHT BARS, CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE 1. TYPICAL FLOOR SLAB TO BE 4' CONCRETE SLAB (3000 PSI)ON COMPACTED FILL WITH GXG- W1,4 X W1.4 WELDED WIRE FABRIC, WIRE MESH LIFTED INTO CONCRETE AS CONCRETE IS POURED. PUBLIX SLAB LOADS ARE APPROXIMATELY 150-200 PSF, 2, FIBER REINFORCEMENT CAN BE USED IN PLACE OF WELDED WIRE FABRIC IN THE SLAB. FIBER REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 100% VIRGIN POLYPROPYLENE, FIBRILLATED FIBERS, SPECIFICALLY MANUFACTURED FOR USE AS CONCRETE SECONDARY REINFORCEMENT(ASTM C-1116). MINIMUM VOLUME OF FIBERGLASS ADMIXTURE PER CUBIC YARD OF CONCRETE IS 0.1 PERCENT (1.5 LBS). THE TYPICAL FIBER LENGTH IS3/4INCHES. SUBMIT PRODUCT TO ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR APPROVAL. 3. PROVIDE A FULLY SEALED VAPOR BARRIER AS PER SPECIFICATIONS. INSPECTION REQUIRED PRIOR TO CONCRETE SLAB BEING POURED. 4. REAR LOADING DOCK SLAB AND RAMPS SHALL HAVE A BROOM FINISH, U.N.O. 5. PROVIDE UNDER -SLAB POROUS FILL, WHERE RECOMMENDED IN GEOTECHNCIAL REPORT. ALSO, REFER TO EARTHWORK SPECIFICATION 312000. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 1. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS SHALL BE HOLLOW UNIT MASONRY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C90 AND SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM NET AREA COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 1900 PSI. 2. IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 530,THE 1900 PSI BLOCK IN COMBINATION WITH TYPE M OR S MORTAR (1800 PSI, MIN,) PROVIDE A DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF FIM = 1500 PSI. 3. FILLED CELL GROUT IS NOT TO BE MIXED ON -SITE, BUT MUST COME FROM A READY MIX SUPPLIER. 4. A MIX DESIGN FOR THE FILLED CELL GROUT MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL, 5. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTS MUST BE CONDUCTED FOR FILLED CELL GROUT. 6. HOOK VERTICAL BARS INTO FOOTING,AND EXTEND INTO AND HOOK IN TOP OF WALL BOND BEAM, PROVIDE STANDARD ACI90 DEGREE HOOK AT DISCONTINUOUS END OF VERTICAL BARS. (10" MIN. HOOK LENGTH), LAP VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT PER MASONRY LIFT DETAIL ON S-7, 7. EXPANSION BOLTS AND/OR SLEEVE ANCHORS ARE NOT ALLOWED IN PUBLIX WALLS, 8. ALL EXTERIOR MASONRY WALLS TO BE FILLED FULL HEIGHT WITH APPROVED MASONRY WALL INSULATION ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. STRUCTURAL STEEL 1. HOT -ROLLED STEEL BEAMS SHALL BE ASTM A992 (50 KSD, PLATES, BARS, CHANNELS, RODS AND ANGLES SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A36. 2, ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM F1554, GR36(MIN.) AND MUST BE MECHANICALLY BENT, NOT TEMPERED OR HEATED. 3. STEEL PIPE SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A53, GRADE B, FY=35 KSI. 4. HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTIONS (HSS) SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A500 GRADE B (FY=46 KSI). 5. ALL WELDS SHALL BE MADE WITH E70 LOW HYDROGEN ELECTRODES, BY QUALIFIED WELDERS AS PER AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY REQUIREMENTS (AWS D1.1). SUBMIT WELDERS CERTIFICATES FOR WELDERS EMPLOYED ON THE PROJECT, VERIFIYING AWS QUALIFICATIONS WITHIN THE PREVIOUS 12 MONTHS. ALSO, ONE OF THESE CERTIFICATAIONS MUST BE AVAILABLE AT THE JOB SITE. 6. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE HIGH -STRENGTH ASTM A325,3/IN.DIA.,UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE SNUG -TIGHT (1/3 TURN AFTER SEATED), U.N.O. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE TEMPORARY BRACING, SHORING AND GUYING OF THE FRAMING AGAINST WIND, CONSTRUCTION LOADS OR OTHER TEMPORARY FORCES UNTIL SUCH PROTECTION IS NO LONGER REQUIRED FOR THE SAFE SUPPORT OF THE STRUCTURE. 8. RETURN ALL WELDS AT CORNERS TWICE THE NOMINAL WELD SIZE MINIMUM. 9. FRAMING CONNECTIONS SHALL BE AISC TYPE 2 DOUBLE -ANGLE BOLTED CONNECTIONS, U.N.O. SELECT CONNECTIONS TO SUPPORT ONE-HALF THE TOTAL UNIFORM LOAD CAPACITY SHOWN IN THE UNIFORM LOAD CONSTANTS, PART 2 OF THE AISC 'ASD' MANUAL, FOR THE SPAN AND GRADE OF STEEL SPECIFIED. 10. NO HOLES, OTHER THAN THOSE SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, SHALL BE PERMITTED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER OF RECORD, 11. WELDS, NOT OTHERWISE DESIGNATED, SHALL BEl/4IN, MINIMUM FILLET. 12. SEE ARCHITECTUAL ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS FOR MISCELLANEOUS STEEL. 13. ALL HEADED STUD ANCHORS (ASTM AL08) AND ANCHOR BOLTS TO HAVE A MIN. 8" EMBEDMENT, U.N.O. 14.ALL INTERIOR PARTITION WALLS AND FRAMING TO BE GALVANIZED,20 GAGE, 3%' STEEL STUDS AT 16' O.C. (U.N.O.), CONFORMING TO ASTM A653 (FY=33 KSU. ALL INTERIOR PARTITION WALLS SHALL HAVE HORIZONTAL BRIDGING AT 5'-0" O.C. MAXIMUM BETWEEN LATERAL SUPPORTS (I.E. SLAB, ROOF DECK, DIAGONAL BRACING ELEVATION). 15.CONTRACTOR SHALL ENGAGE AN INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY AND INSPECTION AGENCY TO PERFORM STEEL ERECTION INSPECTIONS AND TESTING. COPIES OF ALL STEEL INSPECTION REPORTS SHALL BE SENT TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD AND PUBLIX CONSTRUCTION. 16.CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ERECTION TOLERANCES AS STATED IN THE AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE, AISC 303-05. STEEL BAR JOISTS 1. STEEL JOISTS AND RELATED ACCESSORIES SHALL BE ENGINEERED AND FABRICATED BY NUCOR/VULCRAFT AND WILL BE PROVIDED BY PUBLIX. SEE SPECIFICATION 052100 ON THE PM SHEETS. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND STEEL FABRICATOR TO COORDINATE WITH VULCRAFT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL CONNECTIONS. SHOP DRAWINGS WILL BE AVAILABLE FROM VULCRAFT AFTER THE STORE HAS BEEN AWARDED, 3, GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE JOIST DELIVERY DATE WITH VULCRAFT, CONTRACTOR IS ALSO RESPONSIBLE FOR UNLOADING DELIVERY AND COVERING MATERIALS AT THE JOB SITE. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MATERIALS AFTER DELIVERY TO THE JOB SITE. 4. THE JOISTS SHALL NOT SIT ON THE SITE FOR MORE THAN 10 DAYS BEFORE BEING ERECTED. 5. ALL WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPEN -WEB STEEL JOISTS,STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR JOIST GIRDERS,AND THE RECOMMENDED CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST G[RDERS,ALL AS ADOPTED BY THE STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE. 6. JOIST UPLIFT DESIGN MAY INCLUDE 1/3 STRESS INCREASE, WHEN USING THE NET UPLIFT PRESSURES INDICATED ON SHEET S-7. 7. CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL BRIDGING SHALL BE USED INCLUDING WHERE CROSS -BRACING IS INDICATED. WELD BRIDGING TO TOP AND BOTTOM OF JOISTS. 8. ALL JOISTS NOT REQUIRING BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE WELDED TO SUPPORT WITH316 IN. WELDS 2 IN. LONG EACH SIDE. 9. PROVIDE A LINE OF BOTTOM CHORD UPLIFT BRIDGING AT THE FIRST BOTTOM CHORD PANEL POINT, AT EACH END OF JOIST• 10. JOISTS SHALL BEAR 2%2" MINIMUM ON STEEL, JOISTS BEARING ON MASONRY/CONCRETE SHALL BEAR 4" MINIMUM ON AN EMBEDDED STEEL PLATE. 11.DO NOT USE TORCHES TO CUT JOIST CHORDS OR ANY OTHER STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS. METAL DECKING 1. STEEL DECK AND RELATED ACCESSORIES SHALL BE ENGINEERED AND FABRICATED BY NUCOR/VULCRAFT AND WILL BE PROVIDED BY PUBLIX. SEE SPECIFICATION 053000 ON THE PM SHEETS. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND STEEL FABRICATOR TO COORDINATE WITH VULCRAFT SHOP DRAWINGS, WHICH WILL BE PROVIDED AFTER THE STORE HAS BEEN AWARDED. 3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE DECK DELIVERY DATE WITH VULCRAFT. CONTRACTOR IS ALSO RESPONSIBLE FOR UNLOADING DELIVERY AND COVERING MATERIALS AT THE JOB SITE, THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MATERIALS AFTER DELIVERY TO THE JOB SITE. 4. THE DECK SHALL NOT SIT ON THE SITE FOR MORE THAN 10 DAYS BEFORE BEING ERECTED. 5. ROOF DECK SYSTEM SHALL BE 22 GAUGE WIDE -RIB METAL DECK TYPE "B" (U.N.O., AS IDENTIFIED BY THE STEEL DECK INSTITUTE. ROOF DECKING SHALL BE IV2'DEEP AND SHALL BE ATTACHED AS INDICATED ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 6. ROOF DECKING SHALL BE GALVANIZED (G60) AND PRIME PAINTED, U.N.O. 7. ALL DECKING SHALL BE LAID OUT SUCH THAT THE DECK SHALL EXTEND THREE SPANS WITHOUT INTERRUPTION WHEREVER POSSIBLE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, 8. DECK AND SUPPORTING MEMBERS DAMAGED BY EXCESSIVE WELDING HEAT SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED. NOTES: 1. PRECAST LINTELS SHALL BEAR A MINIMUM OF Bit EACH ENO, WHERE LINTEL BEARS INTO A CONC.COLUMN USE ALTERNATE FORMED & POURED LINTEL BEAM. ' 2. CAREFULLY BREAK OUT BOTTOM OF LINTEL ' AT BEARING TO ADMIT VERTICAL REINFORCING WHERE REQUIRED �a TOP OF OP'NG SEE PLAN 6' OR 12" OPENING SPANS UP TO G'-O" TYPICAL LINTEL DETAIL MATCH WALL REINFORCING (TYP. UON) ABOVE CEILING PRECAST LINTEL REINFORCED W/ (2) 115 CONT, & FILLED SOLID W/ CONC. (TYP.) . LINTEL SECTION PAD FOOTING SCHEDULE SEE SHEEETTAL 5-5 MARK FOOTING SIZE DEPTH REINF.( ,CH WAY) REMARKS F2.5 0 - X - 2 6 2 6 10" 3 5 TT BO . F3 3'-0"X3'-0" 12' 4 #5 BOTT. F3.5 3'-6'x3'-6" 12" 4 115 BOTT. F4 4'-0"x4'-0" 12" 5 115 BOTT, F4.5 4'-6'X4'-6' 12" 5 #5 BOTT. F5 51-0"X5'-0' 14' 5 #6 BOTT. F5.5 5'-6"X5'-G' 16" 6 #6 BOTT. FG 6'-0'X6'-0' 16" 7 116 BOTT. F6.5 G'-6'XG'-6' 16" 8 116 BOTT. F7 7'-0'X7'-0' 16" 6 117 BOTT. F7.5 7'-6"X7'-6" 16" 7 #7 BOTT. F8 8'-0"X8'-0" 16" 7 #7 BOTT. F9 9'-0"X9'-0' 18" 9 "7 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG FIO 10'-0"X10'-0" 19" 10 #7 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG Fll 11'-0"X11'-0" 21' 13 #7 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FrG F12 12'-0"X12'-0' 23" L2 118 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG F12.5 12'-6"X12'-6" 24' 13 118 BOTT, WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG F13 13'-0"X13`0' 25" 11 #9 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG F13.5 13'-6"X13'-6" 26" 12 #9 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG F_ I - CONTINUOUS FO01 YNG SCHED6 MARK SIZE W[OTH x DEPTH CONT. REINFORCING TRANSVERSE 2EMiARKS W30 2'-6" X 12" 4 #5 BARS 115 @ 4'-0" O.C. W24 2'-0' X 12" 3 #5 BARS 115 Q 4'-0" O.C. WIG F-4" X 12' 2 #5 BARS THICKENED SLAB T16 1'-4" X 10" THICKENED SLAB FOR RECESSED TRENCH DRAIN BEAM SCHEDULE BEAM ELEV TOP OF BEAM SIZE REINFORCING STIRRUPS - TIES REMARKS TOP BOTT NO. SPACING MB-1 +12'-8" 12"x16" 2#5 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE (x2) MB-2 +10 `-0" 12"x16" MASONRY 2#5 2#5 EXTEND BEAM 24"PAST DOOR JAMB. ALSO REFER TO B/A-2. MB-3 +9'-4' 12"x19/' 2#6 2#6 #3 @ 9" O.C. CONCRETE BEAM BEARING = 24" EACH END. MB-4 SEE PLAN 8'x 8' 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE RB-I +24'-8" 12'xL6' 2#5 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE (x2) RB-2 VARIES 12'x16` Z#5 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE (x2) OR tx3 STEPSI SEE DETAIL BELOW OF STEP. RB-3 +20'-8" 12"x16' 2#5 2#5 K.O,BLOCK COURSE (x2) RB-4 +12'-8" 8"/12'x16" 2#5 2#5 K.O, BLOCK COURSE (x2) PB-I +26'-0' 12'x8" 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE PB-2 VARIES 12' WIDE 24$5 DEPTH OF POURED BEAM VARIES (8" MIN.) ALTERNATE:USE CUT BLOCK,INSTEAD OF RAKED BEAM, SAME REBAR. PB-3 +22'-0" 12"x8" 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE 2 115 BARS IN EACH K.O. COURSE SEE A-7 FOR STEP LOCATIONS, REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT RB-2 FOR STEP IN BOND BEAM METAL ROOF DECK TO BE ATTACHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH WELD PATTERN INDICATED BELOW, INCLUDING: 1. ALL PERIMETER DECK ATTACHMENTS TO DECK ANGLE SHALL BE %°PUDDLE WELD 0 6' D.C. 2. SPACING OF SIDELAP FASTENERS BETWEEN PANELS SHALL NOT EXCEED I2'D.C.(DADE,BROWARD COUNTY ONLY) 3. ANY PARITAL OR SKEWED SHEETS SHALL BE ATTACHED AT EVERY FLUTE, REGARDLESS OF DECK WELD PATTERN. 4. WELDS TO BE 5/$" CIA PUDDLE WELDS AND SIDELAP FASTENERS SHALL BE #10 DRILLPOINT SELF -TAPPING SCREWS. TT TT 11/2" ROOF DECK (22 GAGE) WITH 36/7 WELD PATTERN AND (8) #10 SIDELAP SCREWS PER SPAN I 11/2' ROOF DECK (20 GAGE) WITH 3G/7 WELD PATTERN AND (8) #10 SIDELAP SCREWS PER SPAN I I 36' COVERAGE 4® 36/7 PATTERN �----- �F--------�---� 16 TYP ROOF DECK FASTENER LAYOUT NO SCALE rt ® = 57 PSF = 89 Psr 0 JOIST UPLIFT PLAN (NET) DECKING/ROOFING UPLIFT PLAN DESIGN JOISTS FOR UPLIFT PRESSURES INDICATED IN THE ABOVE PLAN" fl 17 JOIST AND ROOF DECK UPLIFT PLANS NO SCALE Store: 5-7-- Dian Shut:._ Cate issuea:- Publ' SUPER MARKE CORPORATE OFFICES, FACILITIES DI BOX 407, LAKELAND, FL 33802 1063) 680-5295 PHYSICAL ADDRESS: 3300 PUBLIXCORPORATE PARKWAY, LAKELAND, FL 3381 1-331 1 PUBLIX FACILITIES DESIGN DEPARTMEN DAVID TAULBEE, AIA ARCHITECT - FL. REG, 91318 DAVID RUBIN, AIA ARCHITECT - FL. REG.92557 GA. REG.] 1881 SC. REG. 7477 AL. REG. 6234 TN.REG.103497 JOHN W. KITCHENS, PE CIVIL/STRUCTURAL-FL. REG. A5277 GA. REG. 020251 SC. REG.163AO AL. REG.20382 TN.REG.101507 PAU L C. HARMAN, PE STRUCTURAL. FL, REG.51959 GA. REG. 27740 SC. REG.21754 AL. PEG.2A905 TN. REG.107882 JOHN J. CARAMALIS, PE MECHANICAL- FL REG. A3889 GA. REG. 0212A6 SC. REG. 16521 AL REG.20581 TN.REG.108507 ANTHONY CLEMENTI, PE MECHANICAL- FL. REG. SA781 GA. REG.31882 SC. REG.25591 AL REG.28469 TN. REG.111382 RAYMOND J. SIRIANNI, PE ELECTRICAL- FL REG. 54085 GA. REG. 025636 SC. REG. 197A3 AL REG.23065 TN.REG.108038 NORMAN MEIER, PE ELECTRICAL - FL. REG. 59422 GA. REG. 31492 SC. REG.25290 XL. kLG. 28079 © COPYRIGHT 2008 PUBLIX SUPER MARKETS, INC. THESE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARE THE PROI OF PUBLIX SUPER MARKETS, INC. AND ARE NOT TO COPIED OR REUSED FOR ANY SPECIFIC BUILDING WITHC WRITTEN PERMISSION. THESE DRAWINGS SHALL NO DUPLICATED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION I PUBLIX SUPER MARKETS, INC_ THE DESIGN INDICATED IN THESE CONSTRUCTIC DOCUMENTS DOES; TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLED INFORMATION, AND BELIEF; COMPLY WITH THE APPLICF MINIMUM BUILDING CODES PUBLIX PLOT DATE: 10 JAN 08 REVISION DATA: 01 M APR 08 #12A5 (REPL. #0390) ZEPHYR COMMONS PRETTY POND RD. & HWY. ZEPHYRHILLS, PASCO CC FLORIDA DRAWING TITLE: SCHEDULES AND DETAILS SCALE: AS NOTED S-7 J SCALE: 3/" = C-0" 2" DIA. HOLE 133SECTION FOR CABLES S-] SCALE. 3/" = 1'-0" Q am y.: ---,--- ----I--- ----,- • I • I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I i • • I I • SEE SHT.S-1FOR TYP. REINFORCING TO EXTEND FROM FTGS TO I VERTICAL REINFG SIZE AND ROOF OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. SPACING. PROVIDE HOOKED AT MASONRY OPENING LOCATIONS, I DOWELS AT FTGS AND TIE REINFG TO EXTEND FROM LINTEL TO ROOF BEAMS. OR PARAPET BEAM a A R HOOK REINFG I S EQ D. 00 EIN G TO FTG AND BEAM STEEL AT TERMINATIONS. I ALTERNATE INTERLOCKING MASONRY BLOCK COURSES HORIZONTAL JOINT REINF.(9 GAGE) LADDER TYPE @ 16" O.C. (VERT.) r7'�CORNER WALL DETAIL S-] SCALE: 3/° = 1'-0" REINFORCING TO EXTEND FROM FTGS TO ROOF OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. AT MASONRY OPENING LOCATIONS, HORIZONTAL JOINT REINF.(9 GAGE) REINFG TO EXTEND FROM LINTEL TO ROOF LADDER TYPE @ IS" O.C. (VERT.) OR PARAPET BEAM AS REQ'D. HOOK REINFG TO FTG AND BEAM STEEL AT TERMINATIONS. I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I L - 0- M >- PLACE MASONRY IN A RUNNING ~ SEE SHT. 5-1 FOR TYP. VERTICAL BOND PATTERN (TYP.) WALL REINFG SIZE AND SPACING. 4 TYPICAL WALL DETAIL - SCALE: 3/"= I'-0" %2" DIA. BOLTED CONNECTION AS SHOWN; TACK WELD STEEL JOIST @ 5'X0 F " O.C. (MAX.) OR %2" DIA. x 8" LONG HANGING BOLTED CONNECTION, WHEN CHANNEL IS AT BOTTOM OF JOIST ELEVATION. / /� ♦ �/ C4x5.4 WITH SLOTTED HOLES. / NOTE: CHANNEL MAY BE INVERTED / / TO AVOID INSET OF STUD TRACK, ..-""-"► ► ♦/ STUDS (SEE ARCH. DETAILS) 18 GAGE STRAP / @ 48" D.C. (MAX.) j OVER CHANNEL / W/ (6) 1110 SKEWS 30. (3 E.SJ INTO STUD PROVIDE CONT. LATERAL BRACING Mw BETWEEN STUDS ABOVE THE 1 LOCATION OF THE KICKER. 1 I 1 1 , I i � 1 1 i i KICKER BACK TO JOIST BOTTOM 1 ° CHORD OR ADJACENT STUD WALL I ° @ 48" 0,C. MIN. (MATCH STUD SIZE LIGHT GAGE AND GAGE) STUDS (3) #10 SCREWS / 11* SEE ARCH. DETAILS SOFFIT DETAIL (PARALLEL TO ROOF JOISTS) NO SCALE STOP 00 2" BELO COURSE L NE ON 11 CDo z Q „ w I- J U ONLY USE MAX POUR HEIGHT WHERE CLEAN -OUTS CAN BE w o HIDDEN FROM INTERIOR AND r EXTERIOR VIEW. (I.E. BELOW 3 GRADE OR EXTERIOR FINISH) o X w CD MASONRY REINFORCEMENT LAP REQUIREMENTS: 115 = 32" (FOR FBC, USE 30") 116 = 52" (FOR FBC, USE 36") 117 = 61" (FOR FBC, USE 42") FBC LENGTHS ARE FOR FLORIDA ONLY. 3" 3" )MIN.) CLEAN -OUT x HOLE.REMOVE ALL OVERHANG MORTAR AND DEBRIS FROM STD ACI HOOK WITHIN CELL TO BE FILLED TOP OF FND. D D D O D D D D D D D D NOTES: 1. SEE PLANS, SECTIONS AND NOTES FOR LOCATIONS) OF FILLED CELLS AND FOR REINFORCING. 2. CONCRETE FOR FILLED CELLS: STRENGTH = 3000 PSI MIN. @ 28 DAYS (NO FLY ASH) MAX. AGGREGATE SIZE: a' (PEA GRAVEL) SLUMP = 9' +/- V SUBMIT MIX DESIGN FOR REVIEW BY THE ENGINEER. DO NOT USE THE SAME MIX DESIGN AS FOR OTHER CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. 3. ALLOW MORTAR TO SET, 24 HOURS MINIMUM, PRIOR TO COMMENCING GROUTING MASONRY LIFT DETAIL SCALE: 3/q" = 1'-0, �JI ALTERNATE INTERLOCKING I� MASONRY BLOCK COURSES I I I I VERT. REINFORCING TO EXTEND FROM FTGS TO • • ROOF OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. ' AT MASONRY OPENING LOCATIONS, I I I I I I I I VERT. REINFG TO EXTEND FROM LINTEL TO R 0 -'- - - - OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. H R HOOK NF EI G T FT AN BEAM STEEL ATTERMINATIONS. I I 0 G DB SEL - - - - - SEE SHT. S-1 FOR TYP. VERTICAL REINFG SIZE AND SPACING. PROVIDE HOOKED DOWELS AT FTGS AND TIE HORIZONTAL JOINT REINF.(9 GAGE) BEAMS. LADDER TYPE @ 16" O.C. (VERT.) TYP. INTERSECTING WALL DETAIL SCALE: 3/" = 1'-0" REINFORCING TO EXTEND FROM FTGS TO ROOF OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. • AT MASONRY OPENING LOCATIONS, I REINFG TO EXTEND FROM LINTEL TO ROOF OR PARAPET BEAM AS REO'D. HOOK REINFG • I TO FTG AND BEAM STEEL AT TERMINATIONS. SEE SHT. S-1 FOR TYP. VERTICAL REINFG SIZE AND SPACING. PROVIDE HOOKED DOWELS AT FTGS AND TIE BEAMS. TYP MASONRY OPENING DETAIL SCALE: 3/4" = I'-0" SEE 1/S-7 FOR STRAP ATTACHMENT REQUIREMENTS. STEEL JOIST %2" DIA. BOLT @ EACH JOIST (TYP. i ONLY WHEN THERE IS A CONFLICT I C4x5.4 WITH SLOTTED HOLES. I WITH A PANEL POINT, A TACK WELD I NOTE: CHANNEL MAY BE INVERTED ON EACH SIDE OF THE CHANNEL MAY I TO AVOID INSET OF STUD TRACK. BE SUBSTITUTED FOR THE BOLT, I 1 1 I 3o- M!/V STUDS (SEE ARCH. DETAILS) i JOIST I PROVIDE CONT. LATERAL BRACING BETWEEN STUDS ABOVE THE 1 1 LOCATION OF THE KICKER. I 1 KICKER BACK TO JOIST BOTTOM CHORD AT EACH JOIST LOCATION. MAXIMUM SPACING @ G'-O" O.C. i i I I (MATCH STUD SIZE AND GAGE) I j (3) 1110 SCREWS 1 1 I CHANNEL I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i SEE ARCH, DETAILS SOFFIT DETAIL n (PERPENDICULAR TO ROOF JOISTS) NO SCALE 12"x16" CONC BM WITH 2#8 TOP & BOTT. AND #3 STIRRUPS AT 8" O.C/ 12"x16" MASONRY COL VA. W/ 4#7 VERT W/ 2 r1I EACH CELL BLOCK INFILL WITH VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT SPACED PER PLANS. DOWEL INTO HEADER BEAM AND WALL FOOTING. FILLED CELL 12'-0' WIDE MAX. FIN 'FLOOR WALL FTG - - - - - - - - --=1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - =-1--t------- HOOK TO WALL FTG REINFG PRE -NOTCHED CONC MASONRY OFFSET CONTROL BLK.TYP. AT CONTROL JOINTS JOINT TO END OF RUBBER CONTROL JOINT HEADER WHEN WITH BACKER ROD ADJACENT TO OR A OVER AN OPENING. AND SEALANT T 'i♦i yip l� ►O�11 II d �•� ♦� ---- --- --- - -- --- CONTROL JOINTS DONUT (2) #7 IN FILL )CELLS EXTEND THRU TIE BEAMS, %" (1 EACH FACE OF CELL) BOND BEAMS OR HEADERS. TYP CONC. MASONRY BLOCK DO NOT PLACE C.J. OVER OPENINGS. nTYP. MASONRY CONTROL JOINT SCALE: 3�4" = 1'-0" 12' BLK. WALL PROVIDE 12'x14" MIN. BEAM AT EXTERIOR DOOR OPENINGS. #3 TIES AT 12' O.C. (6'-O' MAX. SPAN) 4' TO 31/2" CONC. SLAB W/#5 AT 6" TOP AND #5 AT 8' BOT. (TRANS). ° 2 #5 ° #5 AT G" O.C. 2 #5 1111 °.. SEE ELEVATIONS cn DRIP 2`0'Al EXTEND EYEBROW AND HEADER METAL DOOR FRAME MIN.B"BEYOND DOOR OPNG. SEE SHT A-2 6 ONCRETE EYEBROW- S-7 SCALE: 3/" = 1'-0" TOP/COLUMN = 23'-0" I I I 1 I I L3x3xl/4 BETWEEN BOTTOM CHORD I 1 OF ADJACENT JOISTS. WELD TO JOIST AT EACH END AND TO COLUMN AS SHOWN. i BOT/ANGLE = 2F-IV (APPROX.) /2 I I - I I I I I I I I I I )Is" 4" ° BOT/CHANNELS = 15'-G" (VERIFY) I VV I IIVV, "i Jul ILUULLU. n TYP CONST. OPENING DETAIL I rl 2S ECTION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1� Co HSS COLUMNcn 0 JOIST %" BENT PLATE EACH FACE (WELD TO COLUMN) w CD c3 0 ANGE CHANNELS. NI-16-P3 TO EACH SIDE FOR WINDOW HEADER, �-7SCALE; 1" = 1'-0" A I \ In\ I \� I I \ I I\ \ i I 2,_611 2,_6" I I 11%2" DIA., SCH. 40 PIPE (1.9" O.D. FOR MUSAK DISH i i 2l/2" DIA., SCH. 40 PIPE I I I (2.875" O.D.) FOR _@ II LOTTO DISH WELD CAPS AT ENDS II I I PAINT ALL EXPOSED STEEL WITH OF PIPE/TUBE.(TYP) II TS 5x346 i RUST INHIBITING PAINT. JOIST L 4"x4"x3/8" FRAMED 13A 4° DIA., SCH 40 PIPE AROUND PIPE COLUMN. SHALL BE WELDED ALL S_] AROUND TO ANGLE SUPPORTS. 13 DISH FRAMING PLAN S-7 I SCALE: 3/4" = V-0" - ------- - - - ---------- - - - - -- m PROVIDE (2) 1" I.D. PIPE +I -N FOR CABLE ACCESS, I PIPE SHALL BE WELDED ALL BEND DOWN I ' AROUND TO SUPPORT. (TYP) II ANGLE BEARING ON JOIST ICI PUDDLE WELD METAL DECK WELD TO JOIST i i TO ANGLES. m I I TOP OF JOIST I I GIST L 4'x4"x3/8' - WELD TO ANGLE GIST ill I V I 4" DIA. SCH. 40 PIPE (OD=4.5") HSS COLUMN BEYOND II I I BENT STL PLATE WELD TO COLUMN & �I STL PIPE %' STL BOTTOM PLATE I 3/8" STL PLATE EACH FULL WELD CUT TO FIT FACE (WELD TO COL) 2" DIA. HOLE 13A SECTION FOR CABLES S-] SCALE: 3/" = 1,-0" GENERAL NOTES DESIGN LOADS ).DEAD LOADS,LIVE LOADS AND WIND LOADS ARE SPECIFIED ON THE PLAN SHEETS. 2. THIS STRUCTURE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO COMPLY WITH LATEST EDITION OF THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE AND STANDARD BUILDING CODE. CONSTRUCTION SAFETY 1. THESE DRAWINGS 00 NOT INCLUDE PROVISIONS TO SATISFY SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION, AND FOR CONFORMANCE TO ALL APPLICABLE OSHA STANDARDS. JOBSITE VISITS BY ENGINEER/PUBLIX REP. SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE APPROVAL, AWARENESS OR LIABILITY FOR ANY HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS. 2.00 NOT OVERLOAD ONE SEGMENT OR SPAN OF A BEAM CONTINUOUS OVER SEVERAL SUPPORTS. BEAMS SHOULD BE LOADED AS GRADUALLY AND EVENLY AS POSSIBLE UNTIL THE FULL LOAD IS IN PLACE. 3. ERECTION SEQUENCE SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE CONTRACTOR, AND SHALL NOT CAUSE OVERSTRESS OR EXCESSIVE DEFORMATION OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. 4. NO PROVISION HAS BEEN MADE IN THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR TEMPORARY CONDITIONS OCCURING DURING CONSTRUCTION, UNLESS NOTED SPECIFICALLY ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY SHORING AND BRACING REQUIRED TO RESIST STRESSES OR INSTABILITY OCCURING FROM ANY CAUSE DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSUME COMPLETE RESPONSIBILTY FOR SUCH MEASURES. 5.ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES, DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS L DO NOT SCALE THESE DRAWINGS FOR DIMENSIONS NOT GIVEN. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM NO PORTION OF THE WORK AT ANY TIME WITHOUT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR, WHERE REQUIRED, APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS. 3. THESE GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES ARE INTENDED TO EMPHASIZE CERTAIN INFORMATION MORE COMPLETELY DISCUSSED IN THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS (PM SHEETS), THE CONTRACTOR SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE REQUIREMENTS AS STATED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. FOUNDATIONS 1. FOUNDATION DESIGNED FOR THE SOIL BEARING PRESSURE AS DESCRIBED IN THE DESIGN CRITERIA. IF CONDITIONS AT THE SITE DO NOT PROVIDE THIS MINIMUM VALUE, NOTIFY PUBLIX STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY. 2. FOUNDATION SIZES SHALL NOT BE REDUCED FOR ANY REASON,EVEN IF HIGHER SOIL BEARING VALUES ARE ACHIEVED. 3. TOP OF ALL FOOTINGS TO BE A MINIMUM OF 24" BELOW FINISHED FLOOR. 4. PUBLIX REQUIRES THAT MAXIMUM TOTAL SOIL SETTLEMENTS NOT EXCEED 3/"AND MAXIMUM DIFFERENTIAL SOIL SETTLEMENTS NOT EXCEED %2% 5. PUBLIX REQUIRES SOIL COMPACTION OF 957 OF MODIFIED PROCTOR OR 987. OF STANDARD PROCTOR. REFER TO SITE SPECIFIC GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FOR MORE INFORMATION. REINFORCED CONCRETE 1. CONCRETE MATERIALS, MIXING AND WORKMANSHIP SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH GOOD ENGINEERING PRACTICES AND SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST EDITIONS OF ACI 301, ACI 318 AND ASTM C-94. 2. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A615; YIELD STRENGTH = 60 KSI, MINIMUM. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT REINFORCEMENT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO POURING. PUBLIX MIX DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: NO CEMENT REPLACEMENT(I.E. FLY ASH), 500 LBS. MIN CEMENT MAX, W/C RATIOS: 0.58 FOR 3000 PSI, 0.44 FOR 4000 PSI. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COPIES OF ALL STRUCTURAL CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TEST RESULTS TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR REVIEW. ALSO,CONTRACTOR TO HAVE COPIES OF CONCRETE TEST REPORTS AVAILABLE ON SITE. G. FOR READY -MIX CONCRETE, THE MAXIMUM TIME PERMITTED BETWEEN BATCHING AND DEPOSITING IN THE FORMS IS 90 MINUTES. CONCRETE EXCEEDING THE ABOVE SHALL BE REJECTED. 7. THE ADDITION OF WATER AT THE SITE TO INCREASE CONCRETE SLUMP SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED AND SHALL BE JUST CAUSE FOR REJECTION OF THAT BATCH OF CONCRETE. 8. MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER TO REINFORCING STEEL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS: CAST AGAINST EARTH = 3" EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER - 1%2 BEAMS AND COLUMNS = 12" 9. ALL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE SECURELY HELD IN PLACE BY STANDARD ACCESSORIES DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT. 10. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM LAP SPLICES: 114=29% 115=36", 116=43", 117=63', 118=72', FOR ALL REINFORCING BARS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. DO NOT SPLICE TIE BEAM REINFORCEMENT OVER OPENINGS. DO NOT SPLICE FOOTING REINFORCEMENT UNDER OPENINGS. 11. IN WALL FOOTINGS, CONCRETE BEAMS AND BOND BEAMS,PROVIDE BENT BARS AT CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS OF THE SAME NUMBER AND SIZE AS THE STRAIGHT BARS. CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE 1. TYPICAL FLOOR SLAB TO BE 4' CONCRETE SLAB (3000 PSI) ON COMPACTED FILL WITH GXG- WIA X W1.4 WELDED WIRE FABRIC. WIRE MESH LIFTED INTO CONCRETE AS CONCRETE IS POURED. PUBLIX SLAB LOADS ARE APPROXIMATELY 150-200 PSF. 2. FIBER REINFORCEMENT CAN BE USED IN PLACE OF WELDED WIRE FABRIC IN THE SLAB. FIBER REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 10OX VIRGIN POLYPROPYLENE, FIBRILLATED FIBERS, SPECIFICALLY MANUFACTURED FOR USE AS CONCRETE SECONDARY REINFORCEMENT(ASTM C-1116). MINIMUM VOLUME OF FIBERGLASS ADMIXTURE PER CUBIC YARD OF CONCRETE IS 0.1 PERCENT (1.5 LBS). THE TYPICAL FIBER LENGTH IS3/4INCHES. SUBMIT PRODUCT TO ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR APPROVAL. 3. PROVIDE A FULLY SEALED VAPOR BARRIER AS PER SPECIFICATIONS. INSPECTION REQUIRED PRIOR TO CONCRETE SLAB BEING POURED. 4. REAR LOADING DOCK SLAB AND RAMPS SHALL HAVE A BROOM FINISH, U.N.O. 5. PROVIDE UNDER -SLAB POROUS FILL, WHERE RECOMMENDED IN GEOTECHNCIAL REPORT. ALSO, REFER TO EARTHWORK SPECIFICATION 312000. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 1. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS SHALL BE HOLLOW UNIT MASONRY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C90 AND SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM NET AREA COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 1900 PSI. 2. IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 530, THE 1900 PSI BLOCK IN COMBINATION WITH TYPE M OR S MORTAR (1800 PSI, MIN.) PROVIDE A DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF F'M = 1500 PSI. 3. FILLED CELL GROUT IS NOT TO BE MIXED ON -SITE, BUT MUST COME FROM A READY MIX SUPPLIER. 4. A MIX DESIGN FOR THE FILLED CELL GROUT MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL. 5. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTS MUST BE CONDUCTED FOR FILLED CELL GROUT, G. HOOK VERTICAL BARS INTO FOOTING, AND EXTEND INTO AND HOOK IN TOP OF WALL BOND BEAM, PROVIDE STANDARD ACI 90 DEGREE HOOK AT DISCONTINUOUS ENO OF VERTICAL BARS. (10" MIN. HOOK LENGTH). LAP VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT PER MASONRY LIFT DETAIL ON S-7. 7. EXPANSION BOLTS AND/OR SLEEVE ANCHORS ARE NOT ALLOWED IN PUBLIX WALLS. 8. ALL EXTERIOR MASONRY WALLS TO BE FILLED FULL HEIGHT WITH APPROVED MASONRY WALL INSULATION ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. STRUCTURAL STEEL 1. HOT -ROLLED STEEL BEAMS SHALL BE ASTM A992 (50 KSD. PLATES, BARS, CHANNELS, ROOS AND ANGLES SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A36. 2, ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM F1554, GR36(MIN.) AND MUST BE MECHANICALLY BENT, NOT TEMPERED OR HEATED. 3. STEEL PIPE SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A53, GRADE B, FY=35 KSI. 4. HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTIONS (HSS) SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A500 GRADE B (FY=46 KSD. 5. ALL WELDS SHALL BE MADE WITH E70 LOW HYDROGEN ELECTRODES, BY QUALIFIED WELDERS AS PER AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY REQUIREMENTS (AWS D1.D. SUBMIT WELDERS CERTIFICATES FOR WELDERS EMPLOYED ON THE PROJECT, VERIFIYING AWS QUALIFICATIONS WITHIN THE PREVIOUS 12 MONTHS. ALSO, ONE OF THESE CERT[FICATAIONS MUST BE AVAILABLE AT THE JOB SITE. 6. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE HIGH -STRENGTH ASTM A325,3/IN. DIA., UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE SNUG -TIGHT (1/3 TURN AFTER SEATED), U.N.O. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE TEMPORARY BRACING, SHORING AND GUYING OF THE FRAMING AGAINST WIND, CONSTRUCTION LOADS OR OTHER TEMPORARY FORCES UNTIL SUCH PROTECTION IS NO LONGER REQUIRED FOR THE SAFE SUPPORT OF THE STRUCTURE. 8. RETURN ALL WELDS AT CORNERS TWICE THE NOMINAL WELD SIZE MINIMUM. 9. FRAMING CONNECTIONS SHALL BE AISC TYPE 2 DOUBLE -ANGLE BOLTED CONNECTIONS, U.N.O. SELECT CONNECTIONS TO SUPPORT ONE-HALF THE TOTAL UNIFORM LOAD CAPACITY SHOWN IN THE UNIFORM LOAD CONSTANTS, PART 2 OF THE AISC 'ASD' MANUAL, FOR THE SPAN AND GRADE OF STEEL SPECIFIED. 10. NO HOLES, OTHER THAN THOSE SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, SHALL BE PERMITTED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. 11. WELDS, NOT OTHERWISE DESIGNATED, SHALL BE1/IN, MINIMUM FILLET. 12. SEE ARCHITECTUAL ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS FOR MISCELLANEOUS STEEL. 13. ALL HEADED STUD ANCHORS (ASTM AL08) AND ANCHOR BOLTS TO HAVE A MIN. 8" EMBEDMENT, U.N.O. 14.ALL INTERIOR PARTITION WALLS AND FRAMING TO BE GALVANIZED,20 GAGE, 3%' STEEL STUDS AT 16" O.C. (U.N.O.), CONFORMING TO ASTM A653 (FY=33 KSU. ALL INTERIOR PARTITION WALLS SHALL HAVE HORIZONTAL BRIDGING AT 5'-0" O.C. MAXIMUM BETWEEN LATERAL SUPPORTS (I.E. SLAB, ROOF DECK, DIAGONAL BRACING ELEVATION). 15.CONTRACTOR SHALL ENGAGE AN INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY AND INSPECTION AGENCY TO PERFORM STEEL ERECTION INSPECTIONS AND TESTING. COPIES OF ALL STEEL INSPECTION REPORTS SHALL BE SENT TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD AND PUBLIX CONSTRUCTION. 16. CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ERECTION TOLERANCES AS STATED IN THE AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE, AISC 303-05. STEEL BAR JOISTS 1. STEEL JOISTS AND RELATED ACCESSORIES SHALL BE ENGINEERED AND FABRICATED BY NUCOR/VULCRAFT AND WILL BE PROVIDED BY PUBLIX. SEE SPECIFICATION 052100 ON THE PM SHEETS. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND STEEL FABRICATOR TO COORDINATE WITH VULCRAFT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL CONNECTIONS. SHOP DRAWINGS WILL BE AVAILABLE FROM VULCRAFT AFTER THE STORE HAS BEEN AWARDED. 3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE JOIST DELIVERY DATE WITH VULCRAFT. CONTRACTOR IS ALSO RESPONSIBLE FOR UNLOADING DELIVERY AND COVERING MATERIALS AT THE JOB SITE. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MATERIALS AFTER DELIVERY TO THE JOB SITE, 4. THE JOISTS SHALL NOT SIT ON THE SITE FOR MORE THAN 10 DAYS BEFORE BEING ERECTED. 5. ALL WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPEN -WEB STEEL JOISTS, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR JOIST GIRDERS, AND THE RECOMMENDED CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS, ALL AS ADOPTED BY THE STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE. G. JOIST UPLIFT DESIGN MAY INCLUDE 1/3 STRESS INCREASE, WHEN USING THE NET UPLIFT PRESSURES INDICATED ON SHEET S-7. 7. CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL BRIDGING SHALL BE USED INCLUDING WHERE CROSS -BRACING IS INDICATED. WELD BRIDGING TO TOP AND BOTTOM OF JOISTS. 8. ALL JOISTS NOT REQUIRING BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE WELDED TO SUPPORT WITH3/16IN. WELDS 2 IN. LONG EACH SIDE. 9. PROVIDE A LINE OF BOTTOM CHORD UPLIFT BRIDGING AT THE FIRST BOTTOM CHORD PANEL POINT, AT EACH END OF JOIST. 10. JOISTS SHALL BEAR 2%2"MINIMUM ON STEEL. JOISTS BEARING ON MASONRY/CONCRETE SHALL BEAR 4" MINIMUM ON AN EMBEDDED STEEL PLATE. 11. DO NOT USE TORCHES TO CUT JOIST CHORDS OR ANY OTHER STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS. METAL DECKING 1. STEEL DECK AND RELATED ACCESSORIES SHALL BE ENGINEERED AND FABRICATED BY NUCOR/VULCRAFT AND WILL BE PROVIDED BY PUBLIX. SEE SPECIFICATION 053000 ON THE PM SHEETS. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND STEEL FABRICATOR TO COORDINATE WITH VULCRAFT SHOP DRAWINGS, WHICH WILL BE PROVIDED AFTER THE STORE HAS BEEN AWARDED. 3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE DECK DELIVERY DATE WITH VULCRAFT. CONTRACTOR IS ALSO RESPONSIBLE FOR UNLOADING DELIVERY AND COVERING MATERIALS AT THE JOB SITE. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MATERIALS AFTER DELIVERY TO THE JOB SITE. 4. THE DECK SHALL NOT SIT ON THE SITE FOR MORE THAN 10 DAYS BEFORE BEING ERECTED. 5. ROOF DECK SYSTEM SHALL BE 22 GAUGE WIDE -RIB METAL DECK TYPE "B" (U.N.O.), AS IDENTIFIED BY THE STEEL DECK INSTITUTE. ROOF DECKING SHALL BE 1%2'DEEP AND SHALL BE ATTACHED AS INDICATED ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 6. ROOF DECKING SHALL BE GALVANIZED (G60) AND PRIME PAINTED, U.N.O. 7. ALL DECKING SHALL BE LAID OUT SUCH THAT THE DECK SHALL EXTEND THREE SPANS WITHOUT INTERRUPTION WHEREVER POSSIBLE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, 8. DECK AND SUPPORTING MEMBERS DAMAGED BY EXCESSIVE WELDING HEAT SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED. NOTES: 1, PRECAST LINTELS SHALL BEAR A MINIMUM OF 8" EACH END. WHERE LINTEL BEARS INTO A CONC.COLUMN USE ALTERNATE FORMED & POURED LINTEL BEAM. ' 2. CAREFULLY BREAK OUT BOTTOM OF LINTEL ' AT BEARING TO ADMIT VERTICAL REINFORCING WHERE REQUIRED El F TOP OF OP'NG SEE PLAN 8" OR 12' 10, OPENING SPANS UP TO 6'-0" TYPICAL LINTEL DETAIL MATCH WALL REINFORCING (TYP. UON) ABOVE CEILING PRECAST LINTEL REINFORCED W/ (2) #5 CONT. & FILLED SOLID W/ CONC. (TYP.) ri LINTEL SECTION PAD FOOTING SCHEDULE SCEE SHEEETTSL5 MARK FOOTING SIZE DEPTH RE7(;'.(EACH WAY) REMARKS F .5 Z - - 2' 6"XZ' 6° 10" TT 3 5 BOTT. F3 3'-0"X3'-0" 12" 4 #5 BOTT. F3.5 3'-6"x3'-6" 12" 4 #5 BOTT. F4 4'-O'x4'-O' 12" 5 #5 BOTT. F4.5 4'-6'X4'-6" 12" 5 #5 BOTT. F5 5'-0"X5'-0" 14' 5 #6 BOTT. F5.5 5'-6"X5'-G' 16" 6 #6 BOTT. F6 6'-0'X6'-0" 16' 7 #6 BOTT. F6.5 61-6'X6'-6" 16" 8 #6 BOTT. F7 7'-0'X7'-0' 16° 6 #7 BOTT. F7.5 7'-6"X7'-6" 16" 7 #7 BOTT. F8 8'-0"X8'-0° 16, 7 #7 BOTT. F9 9'-0"X9'-0" 18' 9 #7 BOTT, WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG F10 10'-0'X10'-0" 19" 10 1*7 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG F11 11'-0"X11'-0" 21" 13 117 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG F12 12'-0"X12'-0' 23" 12 118 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG F12.5 12'-6°X12'-6" 24' 13 #8 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG F13 13'-0'X13'-0" 25" 11 #9 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG F13.5 13'-6"X13'-G" 26" 12 #9 BOTT. WWF 6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 AT TOP OF FTG CONTINUOUS FOOTING SCHED. MARK SIZE WIDTH x DEPTH CONT. REINFORCING TRANSVERSE REMARKS W30 2'-6" X 12" 4 45 BARS 115 @ 4'-0' O.C. W24 2'-0' X 12" 3 #5 BARS #5 @ 4'-0" O.C. WIG 1'-4" X 12" 2 #5 BARS THICKENED SLAB T16 1'-4" X 10" THICKENED SLAB FOR RECESSED TRENCH DRAIN BEAM SCHEDULE BEAM ELEV TOP OF BEAM SIZE REINFORCING STIRRUPS - TIES REMARKS TOP BOTT N0. SPACING MB-1 +12'-8" 12"x16' 2#5 2#5 K,O. BLOCK COURSE (x2) MB-2 +10'-0" 12"x16l, MASONRY 2#5 2#5 EXTEND BEAM 24"PAST DOOR JAMB, ALSO REFER TO B/A-2. MB-3 +9'-4" 12"x193/" 2#6 2#6 #3 @ 9" O.C. CONCRETE BEAM BEARING = 24" EACH END. MB-4 SEE PLAN 8'x 8" 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE RB-I +24'-8" 12"xL6' 2#5 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE (x2) RB-2 VARIES 12"x16" 2#5 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE (x2) OR N3 @ STEPS) SEE DETAIL BELOW OF STEP. RB-3 +20'-8' 12'x16" 2#5 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE (x2) RB-4 +12'-8" 8"/12'x16' 2115 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE (x2) PB-1 +26'-0' 12'x8" 2#5 K.O. BLOCK COURSE PB-2 VARIES 12" WIDE 2#5 DEPTH OF POURED BEAM VARIES (8' MIN.) ALTERNATE: USE CUT BLOCK, INSTEAD OF RAKED BEAM, SAME REBAR. PB-3 +-22'-0' 12"x8" 2115 K.O. BLOCK COURSE 2 #5 BARS IN EACH K.O. COURSE SEE A-7 FOR STEP LOCATIONS. REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT RB-2 FOR STEP IN BOND BEAM METAL ROOF DECK TO BE ATTACHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH WELD PATTERN INDICATED BELOW, INCLUDING: 1. ALL PERIMETER DECK ATTACHMENTS TO DECK ANGLE SHALL BE %"PUDDLE WELD 0 G'0-C. 2. SPACING OF SIDELAP FASTENERS BETWEEN PANELS SHALL NOT EXCEED 12' D.C. (DADE, BROWARD COUNTY ONLY) 3. ANY PARITAL OR SKEWED SHEETS SHALL BE ATTACHED AT EVERY FLUTE, REGARDLESS OF DECK WELD PATTERN. 4. WELDS TO BE %` DIA PUDDLE WELDS AND SIDELAP FASTENERS SHALL BE #10 DR[LLPO WT SELF -TAPPING SCREWS. TT TT 11/2" ROOF DECK (22 GAGE) WITH 36/7 WELD PATTERN AND (8) #10 SIDELAP SCREWS PER SPAN j 11/2" ROOF DECK (20 GAGE) WITH 36/7 WELD PATTERN AND (8) #10 SIDELAP SCREWS PER SPAN I , 36' COVERAGE 36/7 PATTERN 4------ 4---i 6 TYP ROOF DECK FASTENER LAYOUT -7 NO SCALE Publi SUPER IMARKE CORPORATE OFFICES, FACILITIES BOX 407, LAKELAND, FL 33802 1863) 680-5295 PHYSICAL ADDRESS: 3300 PUBLIX CORPORATE PARKWA LAKELAND, FL 3381 1-3311 PUBLIX FACILITIES DESIGN DEPARTMEI DAVID TAULBEE, AIA ARCHITECT - FL. REG. 91318 DAVID RUBIN, AIA ARCHITECT - FL. REG.92557 GA. REG. 1 1881 SC. REG.7477 AL REG.a23a TN.REG.103497 JOHN W. KITCHENS, PE CIVIL/STRUCTURAL - FL. REG. A5277 GA. REG. 020251 SC.REG.163AO AL. REG. 20382 TN. REG.101507 PAUL C. HARMAN, PE STRUCTURAL - FL. REG. 51959 GA. REG. 27740 SC. REG.21754 AL. REG.24905 TN.REG.107882 JOHN J. CARAMALIS, PE MECHANICAL - FL. REG. A3889 GA. REG. 021246 SC. REG. 16521 AL REG.20581 TN. REG.108507 ANTHONY CLEMENTI, PE MECHANICAL- FL. REG. 54781 GA. REG.31882 SC_ REG. 25591 AL REG.28469 TN. REG.111382 RAYMOND J. SIRIANNI, PE ELECTRICAL - FL. REG. 54085 GA. REG.025636 SC. REG.19743 AL REG.23065 TN. REG.108038 NORMAN MEIER, PE ELECTRICAL- FL. REG. 59422 GA. REG.31492 SC. REG.25290 AL. REG. 28079 © COPYRIGHT 2008 PUBLIX SUPER. MARKETS, INC. THESE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARE THE PR" OF PUBLIX SUPER MARKETS, INC. AND ARE NOT T" COPIED OR REUSED FOR ANY SPECIFIC BUILDING WIT) WRITTEN PERMISSION. THESE DRAWINGS SHALL N DUPLICATED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSIOD PUBLIX SUPER MARKETS, INC. THE DESIGN INDICATED IN THESE CONSTRUCT DOCUMENTS DOES; TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLE INFORMATION, AND BELIEF; COMPLY WITH THE APPLI< MINIMUM BUILDING CODES PLOT DATE: 10JAN08 REVISION DATA: 1a M APR 08 # 1245 (REPL. #0390j ZEPHYR COMMONS CO PRETTY POND RD. & HWY. ZEPHYRHILLS, PASCO CC FLORIDA ® = 57 PSF ® = 89 PSF 0 JOIST UPLIFT PLAN (NET) DECKING/ROOFING UPLIFT PLAN DESIGN JOISTS FOR UPLIFT PRESSURES INDICATED IN THE ABOVE PLAN" JOIST AND ROOF DECK UPLIFT PLANS NO SCALE 1 ",5 RRP st0ie: a Plan Sheet: I Cate l ,,ued: - -- 54*4 V112707 DRAWING TITLE: SCHEDULES AND DETAILS SCALE: AS NOTED V, 4 List Of Abbreviations A A/C AIR CONDITION E EL ELEVATION L LAV LAVATORY S SC SOLID CORE AB ANCHOR BOLT ELEC ELECTRICAL LBL LABEL SCHED SCHEDULE ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ELEV ELEVATOR LBS POUNDS SCP SCUPPER AD ADJUSTABLE, ADJACENT EMER EMERGENCY LF LINEAR FEET SD SOAP DISPENSER AFF ABOVE REF FINISHED EQ EQUAL LT WT LIGHT WEIGHT SEAL SEALANT FLOOR (SLAB) EQUIP EQUIPMENT SECT SECTION AHU AIR HANDLER UNIT ESC ESCALATOR M MAS MASONRY SF SQUARE FEET ALT ALTERNATE EWC ELECTRIC MAX MAXIMUM SHT SHEET ALUM ALUMINUM WATER COOLER MECH MECHANICAL SIM SIMILAR ANOD ANODIZED EXIST EXISTING MFR MANUFACTURER SPEC SPECIFICATION APPROX APPROXIMATE EXP EXPANSION MH MANHOLE SS STAINLESS STEEL, ARCH ARCHITECT EXT EXTERIOR MIN MINIMUM SERVICE SINK AUTO AUTOMATIC MIN MINIMUM, MINUTE STD STANDARD F FACP FIRE ALARM MISC MISCELLANEOUS STL STEEL B B 0 BOTTOM OF CONTROL PANEL MLDG MOLDING STOR STORAGE BD BOARD FD FLOOR DRAIN MO MASONRY OPENING STRUC STRUCTURAL BLDG BUILDING FDN FOUNDATION MR MOISTURE RESISTANT SUSP SUSPENDED BM BEAM FIN FINISHED MTD MOUNTED SY SQUARE YARD BRIG BEARING FLR FLOOR MTL METAL BTM BOTTOM FIR FIRE RESISTANT MUL MULLION T T TREAD BUR BUILT UP ROOF FR-S FIRE -RETARDANT T&G TONGUE & GROOVE WOOD TREATMENT N NIC NOT IN CONTRACT TBL TABLE C CB CATCH BASIN FT FEET, FOOT NOM NOMINAL TELE TELEPHONE CG CORNER GUARD FTG FOOTING NTS NOT TO SCALE TEMP TEMPERED CI CAST IRON FURR FURRING THK THICK CJ CONTROL JOINT FLIT FUTURE 0 OC ON CENTER TLT TOILET CL CENTER LINE OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER TO TOP OF CLG CEILING G GA GAUGE OPP OPPOSITE TPD TOILET PAPER CLO CLOSET GAL GALLON OVFL OVERFLOW DISPENSER CLR CLEAR GALV GALVANIZED TS TUBE STEEL CMU CONCRETE GB GRAB BAR P PL PLATE TV TELEVISION MASONRY UNIT GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE lYP TYPICAL CO CLEAN OUT GYP GYPSUM PLAS PLASTER COL COLUMN PLBG PLUMBING U UON UNLESS OTHER- CONC CONCRETE H HB HOSE BIBB PLWD PLYWOOD WISE NOTED CONST CONSTRUCTION HC HOLLOW CORE PNL PANEL UTIL UTILITY CONT CONTINUOUS HDW HARDWARE PR PAIR CONTR CONTRACTOR HM HOLLOW METAL PREFAB PREFABRICATED V VB VINYL BASE CORR CORRIDOR HORIZ HORIZONTAL PT POINT VCT VINYL COMPOSITE TILE CT CERAMIC TILE HR HOUR PT PRESSURE TREATED VERT VERTICAL CTR CENTER HT HEIGHT PTD PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER VEST VESTIBULE CU CONDENSING UNIT HTG HEATING PVC POLY VINYL CLORIDE VIF VERIFY IN FIELD CW COLD WATER HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING VTR VENT THRU ROOF D & AIR CONDITIONING Q QT QUARRY TILE VWC VINYL WALL COVERING DBL DOUBLE HW HOT WATER DEPT DEPARTMENT R R RADIUS, RISER, W W WIDTH DET DETAIL I ID INSIDE DIAMETER THERMAL RESISTANCE WI WITH DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN IN INCH RD ROOF DRAIN W/0 WITHOUT DIA DIAMETER INCL INCLUDING RECP RECEPTACLE WC WATER CLOSET DIM DIMENSION INSUL INSULATION REF REFERENCE WD WOOD DISP DISPENSER INT INTERIOR REFR REFRIGERATOR WH WATER HEATER DN DOWN INV INVERT REG REGLET WP WATERPROOF DS DOWNSPOUT J REINF REINFORCEMENT WT WEIGHT DWG DRAWING JAN JANITOR REQ REQUIRED WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC E JB JUNCTION BOX REV REVISION WWM WELDED WIRE METAL EA EACH JT JOINT RM ROOM EB EXPANSION BOLT L RND ROUND Y YD YARD EIFS EXTERIOR INSULATING L LENGTH RO ROUGH OPENING FINISH SYSTEM LAM LAMINATE RTU ROOF TOP UNIT EJ EXPANSION JOINT DX- - — GRID DESIGNATION �_' BUILDING SECTION A3401-2 A301-2 102 ROOM NUMBER SHEET NUMBER ----J— SECTION NUMBER 102A DOOR NUMBER z' _ _ _ _ WALL SECTION A302-3 <"2> WINDOW TYPE SHEET NUMBER -- ------- SECTION NUMBER STOREFRONT TYPE A5N-6 SECTION DETAIL. SHEET NUMBER --- ---- DETAIL NUMBER 'I/ALL TYPE 0 KEY NOTE A8---88 DETAIL REFERENCE & REVISION NUMBER SHEET NUMBER ---- - -- DETAIL. NUMBER T 0 SOMETHING XI XX„ - -- ... ELEVATIONS TACKS 1/;'� �" EXTERIOR ELEVATION • ` A201-1 ? MARKERS �� 'r? SHEET NUMBER -- -- _-- ELEVATION NUMBER SPOT ELEVATION TAG �i e << A4Ii1 2 IN 4 TERIOR ELEVATION \, 1 MARKERS NORTH ARROW �V SHEET NUMBER J 3 � ELEVATION NUMBER - BRICK CONCRETE PLYWOOD GYPSUMn DRAINAGE BOARD �o0 FILL ✓ �•f�% a r FT � RIGID MR MASONRY % � � \� i COMPACTED/� / ; .STEEL � '- L\ 1 ,_ ERTB1 INSULATION i :::::::: BOARD __ � �7 �- - - • 1. ALL. WORK WILL COMPLY WITH LOCAL, STATE, AND NATIONAL CODES 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR ALL RELATED TO THIS PROJECT. EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES ON SITE AT TIME OF INSPECTION. 2. THE WRITTEN DIMENSIONS PREVAIL ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, 9, THE PUBLIX CANOPY SHALL BE FULLY SPRINKLERED. CONTRACTOR TO DO NOT SCALE THESE DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS SUBMIT SIGNED AND SEALED SHOP DRAWINGS AND HYDRAULIC AND CONDITIONS IN THE FIELD. IF ANY DISCREPANCY OCCURS, THE CALCULATIONS TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW AS WELL AS LOCAL CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IN WRITING BEFORE JURISDICTION FOR PERMITTING. NO CONSTRUCTION OF THE FIRE PROCEEDING WITH ANY WORK AFFECTED BY THE DISCREPANCY. PROTECTION SYSTEM SHALL TAKE PLACE UNTIL THE APPROPRIATE PERMITS ARE OBTAINED BY THE FIRE PROTECTION SUB CONTRACTOR 3, CONTRACTORS TO SECURE ALL PERMITS AND REQUIRED INSPECTIONS NECESSARY TO OBTAIN A CERIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY, 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FLORIDA PRODUCT APPROVAL SUBMITTALS FOR THE FOLLOWING BUILDING COMPONENTS THAT 4. CONTRACTORS ARE TO PROVIDE ALL TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND COMPLY WITH RULE 9B-72: INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK, INCLUDING A. STOREFRONT STYLE WINDOWS FIRE PROTECTION AS REQUIRED DURING CONSTRUCTION. B. ROOFING AND COPING 5. EACH CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR IS EXPECTED TO REVIEW ALL 11, CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE THREE COPIES FOR REVIEW AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ISSUED BID. SUBMITTAL TO THE LOCAL JURISDICTION AND PRODUCT SUBMITTAL CHANGE ORDERS WILL NOT BE APPROVED FOR FAILURE TO DO SO. FOR ARCHITECTS REVIEW. 6. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED OR OTHERWISE INDICATED IN THE CONTRACT 12. ALL WOOD SHEATHING AND BLOCKING TO BE FIRE RETARDANT DOCUMENTS SHALL NOT BE SUBSTITUED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN TREATED (FRT) APPROVAL FROM THE ARCHITECT. 13. SEE "RETAIL PACKAGE" DRAWINGS FOR INFORMATION ON THE 7. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL TRADES REQUIRED TO ADJACENT RETAIL BUILDINGS. COMPLETE THIS PROJECT AS REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE THE USE OF THE FACILITY AS PLANNED. 14. SEE STRUCTRUAL DRAWINGS FOR SOILS REPORT INFORMATION Legal Description A TRACT OF LAND LYING IN THE NORTHEAST Y4 OF SECTION 34 AND IN THE NORTHWEST Y4 OF SECTION 35, TOWNSHIP 25 SOUTH, RANGE 21 EAST, PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA. THE SAME BEING A PORTION OF THE ZEPHYRHILLS COLONY COMPANT LANDS SUBDIVISION OF SAID SECTION 34 AND 35 AS SHOWN ON THE PLAT OR MAP THEREOF RECORDED IN PLAT BOOK 1, PAGE 55 OF THE PUBLIC RECORDS OF PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA. ALL BEING FURTHER DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: FOR A POINT OF REFERENCE COMMENCE AT THE SOUTHEAST CORNER OF THE NORTHWEST Y4 OF SAID SECTION 35; THENCE N. 89 5YI3"W., ALONG THE SOUTH BOUNDARY THEREOF, A DISTANCE OF 1638.79 FEET; THENCE N. 00 09'45" W., A DISTANCE OF 657.26 FEET TO THE INTERSECTION OF THE EASTERLY RIGHT-OF-WAY LINE OF U.S. HIGHWAY 301; THENCE NORTHERLY, ALONG SAID EASTERLY RIGHT-OF-WAY LINE, THE FOLLOWING FOUR COURSES; (2) S. 89 46'32" E., A DISTANCE OF 5.00 FEET; (4) NORHTERLY, 625.74 FEET ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT (SAID CURVE HAVING A RADIUS OF 625.73 FEET) TO A POINT LYING ON THE NORTH BOUNDARY OF SAID SECTION 34; THENCE S. 89 58'32" SECTION 34 ALSO BEING THE NORTHWEST CORNER OF SAID SECTION 35; THENCE S. 89 59'50" E., ALONG THE NORTH BOUNDARY OF SAID SECTION 35, A DISTANCE OF 1.015.05 FEET; THENCE S. 00 09'45" W., A DISTANCE OF 2618.58 FEET TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING. LESS AND EXCEPT THAT PORTION OF SAID TRACTS 58 AND 59 CONVEYED IN OFFICIAL RECORDS BOOK 1902, PAGE 690, PUBLIC RECORDS OF PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA. SAID LAND CONTAINING 60.76 ACRES MORE OR LESS. INTERSECTION OF KOSSIK & US HWY 301 (GALL BLVD) Scope of Work ZEPHYR COMMONS CONSISTS OF NEW SITE CONSTRUCTION AND THE NEW CONSTRUCTION OF SEVERAL BUILDINGS. THE SCOPE OF WORK IN THIS SET OF DRAWINGS IS FOR THE PUBLIX FROND CANOPY ONLY. THE SITE WORK, THE PUBLIX GROCER4' STORE SHELL, AND THE OTHER BUILDINGS WILL BE DESIGNED, PERMITTED, AND CONSTRUCTED AS SEPARATE DRAWING PACKAGES. code Information JL.lRISDICTION AUTHORITY CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS THREE (3) SIGNED & SEALED 5335 8TH ST SETS FOR PERMIT SUBMISSION ZEPI-IYRHILLS, FLORIDA33542 (813) 780-0020 PHONE (813) 780-0021 FAX ADOPTED CODES. - BUILDING: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS] FIRE: FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 36 - (NFPA 1 & NFPA 101 W/ STATE FIRE MARSHAL AMENDMENTS) PLUMBING: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, PLUMBING - 2004 W/2006 SUPPLEMENTALS MECHANICAL: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, MECHANICAL - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS ELECTRICAL: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 27 - (NFPA 70, NATIONAL. ELECTRIC CODE) FLIEUGAS: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, FUEUGAS 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS ACCESSIBILITY: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 11 - (FLORIDA ACCESSIBILITY CODE FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION). ENERGY: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 13 - (FLORIDA ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION). BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION DATA OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION (FBC 309) CONSTRUCTION TYPE (FBC TABLE 601) MAXIMUM HEIGHT AND AREA (FBC TABLE 503) MAXIMUM HEIGHT ACTUAL HEIGHT MAXIMUM AREA ACTUAL AREAS *THE PUBLIX AND ADJACENT RETAIL BUILDINGS ARE CLASSIFED AS UNLIMITED AREA AS ALLOWED BY FBC 507 GROUPS M - MERCANTILE TYPE li-B, NEW CONSTRUCTION, SPRINKLERED 55-0" - FOUR STORIES 54'-8" - ONE STORY 12,500 SF* PUBLIX 54 = 54,817 SF RETAIL_ D = 8,600 SF RETAIL F = 9,200 SF TOTAL SF = 72,617 SF CLIENT: PRIMERICA GROUP ONE, INC. STRUCTURAL BBM STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC 3629 MADACA LANE ENGINEER: 1912 BOOTHE CIRCLE SUITE 100 TAMPA, FL. 33618 LONGWOOD, FLORIDA 32750 (813) 933-0629 PHONE (407) 645-3423 (813) 935-3420 FAX (407) 645-3790 FAX CONTACT: LARRY GARREN CONTACT: BORA ERBILEN, P.E., MBA ARCHITECT: CUHACI & PETERSON, ARCHITECTS, LLC ELECTRICAL CUHACI & PETERSON, ARCHITECTS, LLC 1925 PROSPECT AVE ENGINEER: 1925 PROSPECT AVE ORLANDO, FL 32814 ORLANDO, FL 32814 (407) 661-9100 PHONE (407) 661-9100 PHONE (407) 661-9101 FAX (407) 661-9101 FAX CONTACT: GABRIEL ROBERTSON CONTACT: TIM CONWAY CIVIL AVID GROUP ENGINEER: 8659 BAYPINE ROAD, STE 304 JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA32256 (904) 737-4001 PHONE (904) 252-7030 FAX CONTACT: TAMARA D. SCHUMAN, P.E. Publi*x Canopy at ephry Commons," KOSSIK ROAD & US HWY 301 ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA Overall Site Plan (P-�N__' NTS r rs 1 Cok/ja 7 "_, 1Pv r �L' CODE, I;'All .`d ^. ' FLC�1cI� r +E. Sabi C01t :r' y0F ILELECTiZICC >� ZEPfIY1ZLTILLS Q, ODE AN. �� Iblo C4s� ps DI NC k �r4 L4° Ica&`ire erition n ,! dI Drawing Index z V) z o � w cn vi u� a R, . ) - �* -, a clyL�l] «gym ac,0 �hW�h'� - ' to o (N CO '� iY CV r � (N1 --- a 9"'., ` a PLANS f €7y Fire Marshal of ZephyTh1lis SHEET NO. TITLE m �, �i mi �� W a-r _ S WI$1 x °I ) ARCHITECTURAL `= a N a o a o - - vV }1 CC=1s "1CYI S provided e€x COVER SHEET i r i v i v i v i PCA 100 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN —X X X X-- PCA 110 PUBLIX CANOPY PLANS _ _X X X-- -- — -- — — - i— — PCA 201 PUBLIX EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS X X X— PCA 310 PUBLIX CANOPY SECTIONS X X X X— — — PCA 320 PUBLIX CANOPY SECTIONS X X X— PCA 501 PUBLIX CANOPY DETAILS X X X X— PCA 502 PUBLIX CANOPY DETAILS —_ X X X X— C 005 PUBLIX CANOPY SPECIFICATIONS X X X X STRUCTURAL FI Ff TP1(`AI Lj LL r, Scale 1/16"=1'_o" REAR LEFT -- RIUHT FRONT GENERAL ELEVATION AND GRADING NOTES 1. FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION (FIFE) OF THE PUBLIX BUILDING FLOOR SLAB =113.00' 2. SIDEWALKS TO START FLUSH WITH IFFE AT BOTH PUBLIX FRONT DOORS. 3. LOADING DOCK AREA r0 START FLUSH WITH FFE AT REAR DOORS. 4• SIDEWALKS TO START%a" BELOW F.F.E. AT BOTH SIDE DOORS. 5. ALL DOORS TO RECEIVE THRESHOLDS THAT SHALL NOT EXCEED 1/2" IN HEIGHT. RE: PUBLIX SHELL PLANS FOR DOOR DETAILS AND THRESHOLD INFORMATION. 6 ALL SIDEWALKS TO SLOPE AWAY FROM THE BUILDING AT A RATE OF 1% MIN TO 2% MAX. 7. ALL TOP OF CURB (TOC) ELEVATIONS TO BE 6" MAX ABOVE TOP OF ADJACENT PAVING (TOP). REFER TO CIVIL FOR EXACT ELEVATIONS OF ADJACENT PAVING, 8. FOR ANY LOCATIONS WHERE THERE IS GREATER THAN A 6" DIFFERENCE BETWEEN TOC AND TOP, NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. 9. ALL HANDICAP RAMPS TO SLOPE AT 1:14 MAX. THE SURFACE OF ALL CURB RAMPS TO HAVE GRADED AGGREGATE FINISH. RE: PCA100-2. 10. THE BOTTOM OF ALL HANDICAP RAMPS TO BE FLUSH WITH THE TOP OF THE ADJACENT PAVING. REFER TO CIVIL FOR EXACT ELEVATIONS OF PAVING. - EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE 4" THICK 3,000 PSI CONCRETE - FINISH 5/8" SMOOTH RIVER ROCK REINFORCED W/ 6 X �v X 1.4 X 1.4 MIX INTEGRAL. WITH CONCRETE WWF OVER COMPACTED, 1/2"EXPANS#ON JOINT SLOPE 1:14 MAX r z oo°°o e 'X q- O CX1 0 O e o / a )OpO!j J O 0 0 r U -- lJ _ O u x` ^ 777 REFER TO SIDEWALK PLAN ON PCA110 TO SEE WHERE. DETAIL APPLIES 2 HANDICAP RAMP DETAIL Scale 1 1/2"=1'4' 6" PUBLIX 54.4 545340 SF F.F. = 113.00 EXPANSION JOINT /„ SINGLE -COMPONENT POLYURETHANE SEALANT 14" THICK s < ;< _ -" X X — X '------ 1. ALL JOINTS TO BE TOOLED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. ALL EXTERIOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS TO BE 4" THICK, 3,000 PSI CONCRETE REINFORCED WITH GRADE. 6 X 6 X 1.4 X 1.4 W.W.F. OVER COMPACTED FILL. CONTROL JJOINT- 1 "DEEP a / STRUCK JOINT 3. CONTROL JOINTS SPACED AT 6' OC MAX. RE.: SIDEWALK PLAN FOR EXACT SPACING AND LOCATION JOINTS. OF . JO S v v p 4. REFERE TO SIDEWALK PLAN ON ° � 4 e PCA110 TO SEE WHERE DETAIL APPLIES ES 6' O.C. MAX RE: SIDEWALK PLAN FOR SPACING JOINTS AT FRONT OF BUILDING 3 SIDEWALK DETAIL Scale 1 1/2"=V-0" REFER TO SIDEWALK PLAN ON PCA110 TO SEE WHERE DETAIL APPLIES CONCRETE SIDEWALK - - i\ BUILDING CIVIL. W/ CONTROL JOINT �--- RE: A100 6" 2" SLOPE: 1 % MIN - 2% MAX. / PAVING ° ®4 RE: CIVIL_ A a� \/ EBAB- \\CONTINUO— /\�\\\ STOP @ EA \ \�\SIDE OF C11 \ \\\ \\ \ \ \ \\ \ CURB TO BE 6'�//�j\� ABOVE ADJAG\ �\ ° PAVING, MAX \\\ \\/ \/ \ X\/\\ \\ �VAiAA�/�\VAiAA////VAiAA 4 CURB DETAIL Scale 1 1/2"=V-0" 7 HANDICAP RAMP DETAIL NON -BEVELED CLAY PAVERS 3" NOMINAL THICKNESS, SEE PLAN FOR SIZE AND PATTERN, SLOPE 1%MIN -2%MAX NEOPRENE ADHESIVE OVER %" SETTING BED - 93" SAND 7% ASPHALT RE: SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADITIONAL INFORMATION REFER TO SIDEWALK P[AN ON PCA110 TO SEE WHERE DETAIL APPLIES (1) 2" WEEPHOLE AT LOW POINT - 24" OC - SCREEN AS NECESSARY PAVING RE: CIVIL CONCRETE CURB RE:PCA100 4" REINFORECED CONCRETE MLD SLAB TO ENG. SPECS SUBGRADE (95% COMPACTED) CRUSHED GRAVEL l" TOP SIZE, 4" MIN VEHICULAR - ASTM D 2940 WILL VARY PASED ON LOADING CONDITIONS (96% COMPACTION) NON -BEVELED CLAY PAVERS 3" NOMINAL THICKNESS, SEE PLAN FOR SIZE. AND PATTERN, SLOPE 1%MIN -2%MAX, NEOPRENE ADHESIVE OVER 4" SETTING BED - 93" SAND 7% LANDSCAPE �� 6 � ROUND EDGE ASPHALT 2" RADIUS RE: SPECIFICATIONS FOR SLOPE: 1% MIN - 2% MAX. ADITIONAL INFORMATION (1) 2" WEEPHOLE AT LOW POINT�„ _ ' 4 X- 2 OC - SCREEN AS NECESSARY �4 eQ, REFER T 'IDEWALK PLAN N os o .. a\ " PCA110 TO SEE WHERE DETAIL APPLIES N ---- - 511--- 4" REINFORECED CONCRETE MILD J` CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS SLAB TO ENG. SPECS STOP @EACH � • .'e� ° X SIDE OF CJ'S SUBGRADE (95% COMPACTED) CRUSHED GRAVEL %" TOP SIZE, 4" MIN VEHICULAR - ASTM D 2940 REFER TO SIDEWALK PLAN ON _ WILL VARY PASED ON LOADING PCA110 TO SEE WHERE DETAIL T CONDITIONS (96% COMPACTION) APPLIES - 5 PAVER DETAIL Scale 1 1l2"=V-0" DETECTABLE WARNING AREA CONTRASTING COLOR EXPOSED AGGREGATE FOR TACTILE WARNING SURFACE @ ALL RAMPS, RE: A100 � \U) co 1 �� s '� G VOrJ 0000' O o � SLOPED RIBBON CURB FLUSH W/ 1% RAMP, PAINTED10 YELLOW S ••� o0 BOTH � SIDES pP�� 48 b CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY PAVEMENT FIN. GRADE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF RAMP. NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY IF RISE EXCEEDS 6". 8 HANDICAP RAMP DETAIL Scale 1/4"=V-0" v CURB DETAIL Scale 1 112"=V-0" v o ; cD W z 00 VJ(o Co co .LQJ U_ LU Q .E�a :;_1L�� z ui in J U C i I I I I o a ui o E m m UU r- o :D w w X X X F- m m m m m CL EL as 1 o � O of r w o c3 o 0 dCD 0 0 0 E LLj N N N N ui o � _ I = I � I f 01 � a :z er, 9 o s C.0 c� a w ri'i w Co Co �� Q U_� PCA01 PCA02 PCA03 PCA04 PCA05 PCA06 PCA07 PCA08 PCA09 PCA10 PCA11 PCA12 'ICA13 PCA14 PCA15 PCA16 PCA17 PCA18 PCA19 PCA20 PCA21 PCA22 PCA23 PCA24 / / / / / / / / / / 1/ RE: ADJACENT PU LIX PUB IX RE: ADJACENT RETAIL D PLANS CANOPY WORK CANOPY WOK RETAIL F PLANS BUILDING EXP JOINT STAINLESS STEEL ROOF RIDGE, STAINLESS STEEL STAINLESS STEEL STAINLESS STEEL MTL. PANEL WALL PUBLIX ROOF SYSTEM PUBLIX WALL BELOW, STAINLESS STEEL UILDING EXP JOINT PARAPET CAP ON RE: DETAILS DOWNSPOUT TO GUTTER, RE: PCA5 2-4 DOWNSPOUT TO SYSTEM ON INTR. SIDE RE: PUBLIX DRAWINGS SHOWN DASHED PARAPET CAP ON SIDE WALLS SPLASHBLOCK BELOW SPLASHBLOCK BELOW OF PARAPET, RE: �� SIDE WALLS - DETAILS I � I I —— ------------ / STAINLESS D.S. CANOPY WALL LINE INDICATES ASPHALT D.S. L ASPHALT SHING E ROOF DORMER. RE: STAINLESS — / STEEL GUTTER, BELOW (SHOWN CHANGE IN ROOF SHINGLE ROOF D.S. I D.S. SECTION STEEL GUTTER %_4" 4" PVC DOWNSPOUTS (DS)RE: PCA502-4 DASHED) PITCH. RE: SECTIONS ALONG THE PVC DOWNSPOUTS (DS) FROM STAINLESS STEEL FROM LOW GUTTER REAR FRONT OF ALL LOW GUTTER CONCEALED IN D.S. GUTTER, RE: PCA502-4 CONCEALED IN COLUMNS COLUMNS BELOW. CONNECT ALL BELOW. CONNECT ALL a PITCHED ROOFS, DOWNSPOUTS INTO SITE STORM ARCHED GUTTER. o ARCHED ROOF. N ROOF PLAN C M RE: PCA502�1 RE: ELEVATIONS Cl)RE: ELEVATIONS M DOWNSPOUTS INTO SITE DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDER a STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM Scale 1/8 =1'-0' LEFT RIGHT GROUND U a „_ N � a a UNDER GROUND FRONT LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 24" X 36" CEILING ACCESS HATCH. RE: PCA501-6 RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE RE: ELECTRICAL ATM SECURITY LIGHT f BUILDING f EXP JOINT I I I I I I STUCCO CEILING. B 0 FRAMING @ 12'-6" AFF REAR O8 FLAT STUCC 0 SOFFIT. B 0 FRAMING @ 10'-2" AFF FLAT STUC 0 SOFFIT, B 0 FRAMING @ 12'4" AFi REFLECTED CEILING PLAN LEFT RIGHT FLAT SOFFIT W/STONE VENEER. B 0 FRAMIi�G @ 11' 0" AFF f. Scale 1/8"=1'-0" i o ARCHED STUCCO SOFFIT, B 0 FRAMING @ FRONT ARCH BASE= 8'-0"AFF. B 0 FRAMING @ ARCH PEAK=12'-0'+AFF , � I j i I � j OARCH ASE ARCHED9'-4" FF. B 0 FRAMING @ ARCH PEA =1N 0'AFF ARCHED SOFFIT W/ STONE VENEER. B 0 FR�MING @ ARCH BASE= 8'-0"AFF, B 0 FRAMING @ ARCH PEAK=11'-0" AFF i I I i i III i I RE: ADJACENT PU LIX _ _ PUBLIX RE: ADJACENT RETAIL D PLANS C OPY WORK CANOPY WORK RETAIL F PLANS REFER TO BUBLIX SHELL PLANS BUILDING FOR INFORMATION REGARDING li EXP JOINT ! WINDOWS,PUBLIX WALLS, PUBLIX PUBLIX DOORS, AND PUBLIX TM /--BUILDING EXP JOINT -PRESTO ATM AND j 1T-0" SIGN BY PUBLIX RE: PUBLIX PLANS I - --- 6 C 0 0- 0 rL. v LLI Z J Co CO L (¢j Co �0u- Q w �Q z . � 0) F- C14 w � co J U C 0 0 G IL �p I: 0� CL \V U)u- Z 06 J 0 0 X �U)�0 I, uj 0 ® NLu CL N Z Z Lu O O cn fn p D D 2 2 O w > > w X X X J J J 2 m m m 07 CO OD d' O N O o 0 0 Co QLLI N N W CV CV J W 2' - O Co Z m o p 0 Co M � LL! = C7 W 3 Oco N i,J O Z> > o U Y V O i- �' w O o ILI I 0 RE: ADJACENT_ RETAIL D PLANS CANOPY WORK RE: ADJACEN' RETAIL D PLAN; RE: ADJACEN' RETAIL F PLAN; A Frnnt (Fact) FlAvatinn TO RIDGE + 127'-10" AFF T 0 PUBLIX CMU gk 26'-0" AFF B 0 SOFFIT 10'-2" AFF FINISH FLOOR 0'-0" AFF ruoun RE: ADJACENT CANOPY WORK RETAIL F PLANS T 0 PUBLIX SIDE CMU 26'...0" AFF T 0_PUBLIX REAR CMU 22'-0" AFF FINISH FLOOR OIL 0'-0" AFF RE: PUBLIX PLANS i i TIE ALL DOWNSPOUTS DIRECTLY _PUBLIX RE: ADJACENT INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE CANOPY WORK RETAIL D PLANS 3 Rear (West) Elevation SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. RE: CIVIL SCALE: 118"=1'-0" FOR CONTINUATION n / I C------------------ t I I t ELEVATION GENERAL NOTES l 1. RADII SHOWN FOR ARCHED SOFFITS ARE APPROXIMATE. REFER TO CEILING PLANS AND SECTIONS FOR INFO REGARDING THE EXACT HEIGHTS OF SOFFIT FRAMING. 2. REFER TO PUBLIX STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF ALL MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS. STUCCO CONTROL JOINTS TO BE ALIGNED WITH CMU CONTROL JOINTS. EXTENSION OF PUBLIX PARAPET WALL TO ALIGN - W/ PUBLIX WALL AND MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS. CONSTRUCTION TO MATCH PUBLIX PARAPET. RE: WALL SECTIONS AND PUBLIX DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TYP BOTH SIDES. RETAIL BLDG'F' DOWN AS REQUIRED TO PUBLIX CMU 26'-0" AFF J J I — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — - RAIN HOOD RE: PUBLIX PLANS 4 Right Side (South) Elevation SCALE: 1l8"=1'-0" CVTCAI0Il1AI nr ni IDI IV MAMAI'ICT MAI I -r^ Al 1r1•1 0'-0" AFF MATERIAL SCHEDULE MARK MATERIAL REMARKS STUCCO FINISH SYSTEM MEDIUM KNOCK DOWN, PAINTED, COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY OWNER Q BASE CURB RE: SECTION SHEETS O STONE WATER TABLE RE: DETAIL SHEETS: SEE NOTE 2 4O STONE VENEER OWENS CORNING CULTURED STONE - - NOTE 3 O5 E.I.F.S. APPLIED TRIM RE: DETAIL SHEETS O6 NOT USED ---- OPREFINISHED S.S. PTD. FINISH, W.P. HICKMAN CO., INC. ALL RADIUSED SECTIONS TO METAL COPING CAP BE FACTORY ROLLED ODOWNSPOUT & EXPOSED S.S. DOWNSPOUT AT REAR OF PUBLIX SCUPPER SYSTEM RE: PUBLIX DRAWINGS 09 DECORATIVE LIGHT RE: ELECTRICAL PLANS 10 36" MEDALLION 36" PINEAPPLE GROVE MEDALLION MODEL # PARAGEN 039 11 PVC DOWN SPOUT PVC DOWNSPOUT (DS) IN COLUMN TO TIE INTO STORM SYSTEM TYP. RE: CIVIL FOR CONTINUATION OF STORM LINE UNDERGROUND 12 SURFACE MOUNTED SPANDREL GLASS WINDOW WITH CLEAR ANNODIZED ALUM. WINDOW FRAMING. INSTALLED OVER THE OUTSIDE OF PUBLIX WALL. 13 2' x 8' AREA OF 3/4" INSTALL IN PLACE OF DENS GLASS IN THIS AREA FRT PLYWOOD BEHIND ENTRANCE AND EXIT SIGNS FOR BACKING 14 ATM MACHINE ATM AND PRESTO SIGN RE: PUBLIX DRAWINGS 15 PUBLIX SIGNAGE RE: PUBLIX DRAWINGS 10' X 20' AREA OF 3/4" INSTALL IN PLACE OF DENS GLASS IN THIS AREA 16 FRT PLYWOOD BEHIND PUBLIX SIGN FOR BACKING 17 STOREFRONT SYSTEM CLEAR ANNODIZED ALUM. STOREFRONT STYLE SLIDING DOORS. RE: PUBLIX DRAWINGS 18 ASPHALT SHINGLES ---- SHUTTER BY EDON CORP. MODEL ELP-5 PAIR SEE NOTE 1 20 STOREFRONT WINDOW CLEAR ANNODIZED ALUM. STOREFRONT STYLE FIXED WINDOW. RE: PUBLIX DRAWINGS NOTES: 1. PROVIDE A PAIR OF EDON FIBERGLASS SHUTTERS. 5'-4"X4'-0" LOUVERED. PROVIDE MANUFACTURES ATTACHMENT DETAILS FOR APPROVAL. 2. OWENS CORNING "WATERTABLE" TR-1 TO BE INSTALLED IN THE STRICTEST ACCORDANCE WITH OWEN CORNINGS WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AND APPLICABLE CODES 3. CULTURED STONE ON MORTAR SETTING BED ON 2.51-B EXPANDED METAL LATH (GALVANIZED) ON MOISTURE RESISTANT BARRIER. LATH TO BE ATTACHED AT 6" O.C. VERTICAL AND AT 6" O.C. HORIZONTAL. ENTIRE SYSTEM TO BE INSTALLED IN THE STRICTEST ACCORDANCE WITH OWEN CORNINGS WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AND APPLICABLE CODES. on w O Q 3 Q i (Dw z JcoQD .L cn CD Q <0 IL Q LU Q z •LNG w cM H .J U 0 w i // 0� 0 orf w w J 00 w w x U) CL LU i O o w D D o > > w X X X m m m cL ii a- EL m w w � O N c� N w �I �I rI 0I CD cn� 0 0 u� N N N N J w z co z rn o co CN o LU M o z o o w CYO CD PCA 201 5 Left Side (North) Elevation SCALE: 1l8"=1'-0" PCB 1 i I 2'4' 3'-8" 6'-0" - 12 18 A SHINGLES. SEE NOTE ATLErT 12 r \ \ TO PUBLIX CMU RE: PCA502 FOR ROOF 26'-0" AFF 18 / TERMINATION AND PARAPET DETAILS RE: PCA502 FOR ROOF RIDGE DETAIL---' SELF-SEALING SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT OVER 5/8" FRT PLYWOOD ROOF SYSTEM. / / ! RE: PUBLIX DWGS ! r / /-- ROOF FRAMING. RE: PUBLIX DWGS 12 CHANGE IN 5 TRUSS PITCH 18'-10" AFF S.S. GUTTER TIED INTO DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN COLUMN BEYOND. ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE TIED DIRECTLY �`- LIGHT GAUGE ROOF INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM � TRUSSES. RE: UNDERGROUND. RE: ROOF PLAN = ! STRUCTURAL DWGS _ II TRUSS BEARING 15'-8" AFF ^� - SPRINKLER HEAD � I I TURNED UP TO PROTECT STRUCTURE ROOF EAVE. RE: PCA502 _.. 1--_ - STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL..- = - -- RE: CANOPY STRUCTURAL I ! RDWGS FOR INFORMATION REGARDING TRUSS � � -- - - - - - -- - -- -- -- - - - - SUPPORT AT PUBLIX WALL B 0 CLNG FRAMING 12'-6" AFF I _, J - - - - RE: CANOPY STRUCTURAL LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. - — - — - --- I III DWGS FOR INFORMATION RE: STRUCTURAL . ! ( III SPRINKLER HEAD / REGARDING ALL FILLED CELLS THAT HAVE BEEN B 0 SOFFIT FRAMING I _ _ SOFFIT BEYOND - - ADDED TO THE TYPICAL / PUBLIX WALL DESIGN 10'-2" AFF - - t CONTINUOUS CEILING VENT - -� / I MASONRY WALL. 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8 / RE: PUBLIX DWGS DENSGLASS SHEATHING / / I I STUCCO OVER SHEATHING EIFS TRIM. RE: PCA501 --' % j I I - -STUCCO FINISH ON I \\\ EIFS TRIM BEYOND. RE: PCA501 EXTERIOR OF WALL i DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 I �,h -STEEL COLUMN BEYOND. RE: PUBLIX DWGS RE: STRUCTURAL FOR INFO REGARDING STUCCO FINISH OVER LIGHT ---------- -- - ! I I FINISHES ON GAUGE COLUMN BEYOND ! I I INTERIOR OF WALLS I I T-6" 01 10 -- PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. ! I I JOINT BETWEEN PUBLIX BASE CURB, STONE WAINSCOT, WALL AND BASE CURB AND SILL BEYOND „ PROVIDE 1/2 EXP. BASE CURB, STONE WAINSCOT, JOINT BETWEEN BASE i AND SILL, RE: PCA501 CURB AND SIDEWALK RE: PCA502 FOR ROOF RIDGE DETAIL 12 � 12 SHINGLES. SEE 18 / \ 18 NOTE AT LEFT T 0 DORMER FRAMING AFF 12 _ - - - / � / \ \ \ � � SHINGLES. SEE _ _ _ NOTE AT LEFT zztSELF-SEALING SHINGLES OVER 30# - - -- --I— 6 / / \ \ FELT OVER 5/8" FRT PLYWOOD j ! RE: PCA502 FOR ROOF TERMINATION AND FASCIA BOARD PARAPET WALL DETAILS TO PUBLIX CMU 26'-0" AFF SPANDREL WINDOW EIFS TRIM. RE: PCA501 SHINGLES. SEE NOTE ABOVE CHANGE IN TRUSS PITCH ! ! / / ROOF SYSTEM. 22'-0" AFF tea, ! ! / RE: PUBLIX DWGS S.S. GUTTER TIED INTO 12 DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN 5 ROOF FRAMING. COLUMN BEYOND. ALL - RE: PUBLIX DWGS DOWNSPOUTS TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM �- LIGHT GAUGE ROOF UNDERGROUND. TRUSSES. RE: TRUSS BEARING y -------------------------- -- ----------------� � STRUCTURAL DWGS 18'-10" AFF 1 J/ I SPRINKLER. HEAD ROOF EAVE. RE: PCA502 ! TURNED UP TO PROTECT STRUCTURE ,STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL RE: CANOPY STRUCTURAL I I DWGS FOR INFORMATION EIFS TRIM. RE: PCA501 REGARDING TRUSS I I SUPPORT AT PUBLIX WALL LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. - ---- -- - -_.-- - I I STEEL BEAM, RE: STRUCTURAL �I I RE: STRUCTURAL B 0 BEAM I / - LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING.--- / RE: STRUCTURAL AFF I I B 0 CLNG FRAMING-- 12'-6" AFF B 0 SOFFIT �/ - ° - RE- CANOPY STRUCTURAL FRAMING AT ---4 - -- \ DWGS FOR INFORMATION SPRINKLER HEAD --ARCH PEAK-%--�--- - �, `� REGARDING ALL FILLED Y 12`-0" AFF i ! --------I ------ �\ /✓ CELLS THAT HAVE BEEN I I SOFFIT BEYOND -� ADDED TO THE TYPICAL PUBLIX WALL DESIGN 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8" ---I --- - -- - I - �� --- - --- --- - --- - ----- ---- DENSGLASS SHEATHING -- CONTINUOUS CEILING VENT --- MASONRY WALL. I I RE: PUBLIX DWGS DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 �r STUCCO OVER SHEATHING - \ -- - - STUCCO FINISH ON ARCHED SOFFIT BEYOND EXTERIOR OF WALL --- -- STEEL COLUMN BEYOND. RE: PUBLIX DWGS I I RE: STRUCTURAL FOR INFO REGARDING I I FINISHES ON STUCCO FINISH OVER LIGHT -- -- -- I I INTERIOR OF WALLS GAUGE COLUMN BEYOND I I 8'-6" I I PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. ! I I ! JOINT BETWEEN PUBLIX I I ! BASE CURB, STONE WAINSCOT, WALL AND BASE CURB I ! AND SILL BEYOND PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. T- BASE CURB, STONE WAINSCOT, JOINT BETWEEN BASE - / AND SILL. RE: PCA501 CURB AND SIDEWALK , 1'-6" , 10" , T-8" 6'-4" SELF-SEALING SHINGLES OVI FELT OVER 5/8" FRT PLYW00 S.S. GUTTER TIED INTO DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN COLUMN BEYOND. ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. TO ARCHED FRAMING 28'-10" AFF l ROOF EAVE. RE: PCA502 TO PUBLIX CMU 26'-0" AFF CHANGE IN TRUSS PITCH 25'-2" AFF LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL TRUSS BEARING- 22'-0" AFF STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL—� LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. - RE: STRUCTURAL REPLACE DENS GLASS WITH -- -� FRT PLYWOOD FOR 10' X 20' AREA BEHIND FUTURE SIGN. RE: ELEVATIONS. i/ PUBLIX SIGN, BY TENANT , 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8" - DENSGLASS SHEATHING B 0 BEAM 13-0" AFF L B 0 CLNG FRAMING B 0 SOFFIT FRAMING 12'-0" AFF DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 STUCCO FINISH OVER LIGHT GAUGE COLUMN BEYOND OIL TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF I I I I I I L-----------J 3 Canopy Section SCALE: 112"=1'-0" i PCA ' i I 12 RE: PCA502 FOR 18 ROOF RIDGE DETAIL \ \ \ SHINGLES. SEE \ NOTE AT LEFT 1 i RE: PCA502 FOR ROOF ! ! TERMINATION AND I f PARAPET WALL I DETAILS ! ! I �1 ROOF SYSTEM. RE: PUBLIX DWGS ROOF FRAMING. RE: PUBLIX DWGS �- � RE: CANOPY STRUCTURAL DWGS FOR INFORMATION \ REGARDING TRUSS SUPPORT AT PUBLIX WALL -- SPRINKLER HEAD TURNED UP TO PROTECT STRUCTURE �- LIGHT GAUGE ROOF TRUSSES. RE: STRUCTURAL DWGS RE: CANOPY STRUCTURAL DWGS FOR INFORMATION REGARDING ALL FILLED CELLS THAT HAVE BEEN ADDED TO THE TYPICAL PUBLIX WALL DESIGN MASONRY WALL. RE: PUBLIX DWGS STUCCO FINISH ON EXTERIOR OF WALL RE: PUBLIX DWGS FOR INFO REGARDING FINISHES ON INTERIOR OF WALLS PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN PUBLIX WALL AND BASE CURB PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN BASE CURB AND SIDEWALK CONCRETE SLAB. RE: PUBLIX DWGS CANOPY SECTION GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO CANOPY STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION REGARDING CANOPY FOUNDATIONS, COLUMNS, BEAMS, LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING, AND TRUSS WORK. 2) THE CEILING SHEATHING SHALL BE SUPPORTED @ 16" OC MAX EACH WAY. OPTION 1- SPACE THE LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING @ 16" OC. OPTION 2 - SPACE THE LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING @ 24" OC AND PROVIDE 1-1/2" BLOCKING AND HAT CHANNELS OVER THE FRAMING FOR SHEATHING ATTACHMENT. Cn 'c N N v' 0 Ed 00 0 M p v � >o E 0 .4 0 do 0 U w � U V J ri U Vp C14' � U C 0 L v W z CD 00 CO •SJ UM OLu a" z04 z w In co F- U I i U) 0 E 0 II f N Cu o Q,1 J CL Cl) 0 06_jz C x0yo w I w � I ®_ Lu Ow< W f o N w CL c z w vo O ' J dQ �- z Lu s w �- 0 0 '-'-' co Cn D o 2 o w > > w X X X �- _1 J J 2 m m m m m m W mmm� mCD!�2zi O N © ti iV �I O I w CD o S S S l u�C N N N J W Of 0 1 o CD o p F- co c•5 O w uj Z LU s d O a U U SPRINKLER HEAD / \ \ TURNED UP TO PROTECT STRUCTURE 12 / / \ \ 12 18 / / \ \ 18 SHINGLES. SEE NOTE AT LEFT STAINLESS STEEL FLAG POLES AND BASE. G.C. TO PROVIDE SIGNED & / / \ LIGHT GAUGE ROOF SEALED SHOP DWGS FROM A FL. / / \ \ TRUSSES. RE: REGISTERED ENGINEER TO THE / / \ \ STRUCTURAL DWGS ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW & AS NEEDED FOR PERMITTING � j STAINLESS STEEL PCE� / / / \ \ \ PCA� GUTTER TO DOWNSPOUT SELF-SEALING SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT OVER 5/8" FRT PLYWOOD � \ \ 1-10 4 6 8'-5" 7-5' 1'-6" 2'-2' S.S. GUTTER TIED INTO DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN COLUMN BEYOND. ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. 12 / / I \ \ 12 CHANGE IN 12 / / \ \ �12 TRUSS PITCH 35'-2" AFF r r \ \ r r \ \ 0 --- —------ ---- -- —— — — — — — — — — -- — i TRUSS BEARING -_-------.--_----------- - ---_---J 32'-0" AFF / ROOF EAVE. RE: PCA502 TO FRAMING OPENING o o Q ROOF EAVE. �' o ✓ I 29'-11"AFF RE: PCA502 -- i � oo�o � 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8" - I I \ o o ✓ J L STUCCO OVER DENSGLASS SHEATHING i i o SHEATHING CULTURED STONE VENEER o 0 o r ✓ z METAL PANELS. RE: { o r w -- PCA502 FOR ROOF Lu PARAPET WALL I��OwS AROUND Cp --= DETAILS TO PUBLIX CMU STAINLESS _ 26'-0" AFF _ I i DOWNSPOUT TO STEEL B 0 FRAMING Ak OPENING 23'-8" AFF �-. TO BEAM 23'-2" AFF SPANDREL WINDOW EIFS TRIM. RE: PCA501 - -/ STEEL BEAM, RE: STRUCTURAL CULTURED STONE VENEER OVER FRT PLYWOOD SHEATHING LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL STEEL BRACING. RE: --- STRUCTURAL STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL B O BEAM 13'-0" AFF B 0 CLNG FRAMING 12'-6" AFF B 0 SOFFIT FRAMING AT ARCH PEAK 11'-0" AFF BASE CURB, STONE WAINSCOT, - AND SILL BEYOND RIBBON CURBS AT DOORS. FLUSH WITH PUBLIX FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION. RE: PCA110-4 FOR SIDEWALK PLAN SLOPE 1 % MIN - 2% MAX TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF COLUMN FOOTING BEYOND. RE: STRUCTURAL PUBLIX FOOTING. RE: PUBLIX DWGS. EXTEND AS NEEDED TO SUPPORT RIBBON CURB. 1 Tower Section SCALE: 1/2"=1'-0" PROVIDE 112" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN PUBLIX WALL & RIBBON CURB CANOPY SECTION GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO CANOPY STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION REGARDING CANOPY FOUNDATIONS, COLUMNS, BEAMS, LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING, AND TRUSS WORK. 2) THE CEILING SHEATHING SHALL BE SUPPORTED @ 16" OC MAX EACH WAY. OPTION 1 - SPACE THE LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING @ 16" OC. OPTION 2 - SPACE THE LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING @ 24" OC AND PROVIDE 1-112" BLOCKING AND HAT CHANNELS OVER THE FRAMING FOR SHEATHING ATTACHMENT. r rl 00 �a W 00 tV y M O ^�, W >o E • �..� o Q o O U o `moo. 0 N 0 CL O L_ ow Z CU J 00 c� •�aJ �Qco co - w Ega w Ic a J M I- U f 0 E 0 CL N -+-a cu O �y � ) 0 �=J .:� 0' �U) TELL U)' ®eNCL' Cl) 0 S_ 0 I' Cu uj x F_ I- w , i m 0 0 "' m SQ D 2 2 0 w W > > x x x �- J J J a m m m O O VV O N CV O w m LaL N N N N J o z rn q C? U to lyl o LO � N w O o w Z o Y m w V V ELEVATION SECTION A:A 1 _ PCA 501 24Detai.1 Detail ;�,l QUOIN DETAIL Rr 2M „_ 7 I Scale 1-1/7=1'4' 518" SCR 3 1 EAVE DETAIL Scale 3"=1'-0" S.S. CV ELF SEALING ASPHAULT SHINGLES ON #30 FELT OVER %" F.R.T. TYPE "X" PLYWOOD ONT. CLIP ATT. W/ S.S. SCREW @ 8" O.C. CREW IN WOOD BLOCKING @ 18" O.C. 4" I 2 GA. S.S. GUTTER STRAP @ 36" (STAGGER 18" FROM SUPPORT. ATTACH WITH SCREWS OR POP RIVETS `� 5„ = 02 STAINLESS STEEL PROTRUDING RIVET CONT. S.S. DRI - 8 GAGE S.S. RECTANGULAR GUTTER - STYLE A FLASHING 10 GA. S.S. FM ROLL OVER HANGER @ 36" O.C. STAGGER 18" FROM STRAP MASONRY WALL RE: PUBLIX DWGS. S.S. DOWNSPOUT TO CONC. SPASHBLOCK - S.S. REGLET ATT. TO WALL W/ S.S. SCRWS @ NEOPRENE WASHERS @ 8" O.C. 2 PIECE SNAP -IN S.S. COUNTER FLASHING SYSTEM CONCURRENT W/ THE PLY SHEET FLASHING SYSTEM INSTALLATION SET BASE FLASHING IN COLD APPLIED / MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOF CEMENT EXTEND MIN, 4" ABOVE CANT (18°" MAX HT) / CONT. 4" FIBER OR PERLITE CANT STRIP CANOPY ROOF SYSTEM TO MATCH PUBLIX ROOF RE: ROOF PLANS FOR SLOPE INFORMATION RE: STRUCTURAL FOR ROOF FRAMING INFO Z NOTE: FLASHINGS MIN. 266ACORROSIO RESISTANT MTL. " b GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT DETAIL NTS V-7 3/4" SPIRE BASE IS 3-3 1/2" FIBERGLASS SPIRE ICE AND WATER SHIELD CONT /--- 6")c 18GA. FASTENING TO TRUSSES APPROVED BY BBM, INC STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS -- S.S. FLASHING W/SCREWS AND NEOPRENE WASHERS PRE-ENGINEERED TRUSS SYSTEM ASPHALT SHINGLES NOTE 1. SPIRE BY EDON CORP. 215-672-8050 6'-7" FINIAL SPIRE W/ BALL ES-509(A) OR ARCH APPROVED EQUAL 2. SPIRE MANUFACTURES CONNECTION OF SPIRE TO STRUCTURE TO BE APPROVED BY BBM STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 10 FINIAL CAP DETAIL Scale 3"=V-0" - STUCCO SYSTEM OVER EXTERIOR WALL STUCCO BANDING BEAD CONT SNAP -IN FLASHING TYPE "A" 15� FLASHING CLIPS @ 12" O.C. CONT 2x NAILER P.T. NAILER CONT FLASHING TYPE "B" UNDERLAYMENT SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT ROOF TRUSS SYST M RE: STRUCTURAL NOTE: FLASHINGS MIN. 266A CORROSION RESISTANT MTL. 2 RIDGE ABUTMENT DETAIL w/4"MIN. OVERLAP Scale 3"=V-0" STARTER SHINGLE W/ CONT. BUTYL CAULK STRIP FOLD SHINGLE @ "VALLEY" MIDPOINT 5/8" FIRE -RETARDANT PLYWOOD SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT UNDERLAYMENT PROVIDE 24" STRIP OF ICE & WATER SHIELD AT "VALLEY" CONT. 7VALLEY DETAIL_ Scale 3"=V-0" BUILDING WALL. SHEATHING OVER FRAMING SHOWN. SOME LOCATIONS WILL HAVE CMU. RE: SECTIONS STONE VENEER SLOPE TOP 1" PER FT MIN - EIFS TRIM PROFILE 7" 5' JI V-4" DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF STONE TO OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS. ADJUST OVERALL WIDTH AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE APPROX 5" DIMENSION. 11 EIFS Profile Scale 3"=V-0" EIFS PROFILE BELOW TOWER WINDOW CD RIDGE ABUTMENT TYPE "B" FLASHING N.T.S. V8" DENSGLASS SHEATHING Y4" STUCCO FINISH SYSTEM Y8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING CONT CASING BEAD BACKER ROD W/ SEALANT CONT. COUNTER FLASHING TYPE "C" ATTACH 12" O.C. CONT TYPE "A" FLASHING CONT 2X P.T. NAILER STEP FLASHING CONT 2X4 NAILER SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT ICE AND WATER SHIELD NOTE: FLASHINGS MIN. 266A CORROSION RESISTANT MTL. W/4" MIN. OVERLAP WALL ABUTMENT DETAIL ale 3"=V-0" 1� WALL ABUTMENT WALL ABUTMENT TYPE "A" FLASHING TYPE "B" FLASHING N.T.S. N.T.S. LATH Y8" SHEATHING STONE VENEER MORTAR SETTING BED WEATHER RESISTANT MOISTURE BARRIER Y8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING METAL HANGAR BACKER ROD W/ SEALANT FLASHING W/ DRIP EDGE CONT. COUNTER FLASHING TYPE " C" ATTACH 12" O.C. - CONT TYPE "A" FLASHING r, CONT 2X P.T. NAILER STEP FLASHING - CONT 2X4 NAILER SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT `t z ICE AND WATER SHIELD CV 3" MIN 5/" FRT PLYWOOD SHEATHING WALL ROOF TRUSS RE: STRUCTURAL NOTE: FLASHINGS MIN. 266A CORROSION RESISTANT MTL. W/ 4" MIN. OVERLAP 8 WALL ABUTEMENT DETAIL Scale 3"=1'-0" - ----- BUILDING WALL. SHEATHING OVER FRAMING SHOWN. SOME LOCATIONS WILL HAVE CMU RE' SECTIONS STUCCO FINISH SLOPE TOP 1" PER FT MIN EIFS TRIM PROFILE DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FINISH TO OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS. I I A 1" v 1" 3" 12 EIFS Profile Scale 3"=V-0" EIFS PROFILE AT BOTTOM OF SOFFIT 22 GA. S.S. GUTTER STRAP @ 36" (STAGGER 18" FROM SUPPORT. ATTACH WITH SCREWS OR POP RIVETS 302 STAINLESS STEEL - PROTRUDING RIVET €n 28 GAGE S.S. RECTANGULAR GUTTER - STYLE A 10 GA. S.S. FM ROLL OVER HANGER @ 36" O.C. STAGGER 18" FROM STRAP 5" Ll SELF SEALING ASPHALT SHINGLES ON #30 FELT OVER %" F.R.T. PLYWOOD CONT, CLIP ATT. WI S.S. SCREW @ 8" O.C. SCREW IN WOOD BLOCKING @ 18" O.C. S.S. HANGER CONT. S.S. 5Ya N DRIP FLASHING ti A RECTANGULAR GUTTER DETAIL _T Scale 3"=1'-0" WALL ABUTMENT WALL ABUTMENT TYPE "A" FLASHING TYPE "B" FLASHING N.T.S. N.T.S. BUILDING WALL, SHEATHING OVER FRAMING SHOWN. SOME LOCATIONS WILL HAVE CMU. RE: SECTIONS STUCCO FINISH SLOPE TOP 1" PER FT MIN EIFS TRIM PROFILE -� DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FINISH TO OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS. 13EIFS Profile Scale 3"=V-0" EIFS PROFILE ON CANOPY COLUMNS Detail Scale 1 1/2"=1-0" BUILDING WALL. SH" ""'- OVER FRAMING SHC SOME LOCATIONS V CMU. RE: SECTION STUCCO FINISH — SLOPE TOP 1" PER F EIFS TRIM PROFILE DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FINISH TO OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS. 14 EIFS Profile Scale 3"=V-0" EIFS PROFILE AT BASE OF DORMERS NOTE: FLASHINGS MIN. 266A CORROSION RESISTANT MTL. RIDGE /HIP CAP SHINGLE SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT 5/8" FIRE -RETARDANT -- PLYWOOD UNDERLAYMENT ?= F.R.T. PLYWOOD SHEATHING & ROOF TRUSS SYSTEM RE: STRUCTURAL 5RIDGE / HIP DETAIL Scale 1 1/2"=l'-0" mk f 0 DORMER FRAMING 29'-6" AFF 12 SELF-SEALING SHINGLES 18 OVER 30# FELT OVER I /Z 518" FRT PLYWOOD FASCIA BOARD —� 12 5 �I SPANDREL WINDOW _ ❑ EIFS TRIM. RE: PCA501 ❑ ❑ o N 1'-2" 2'-4" 1'-2" 5'-8" RE: PCA 310-2 FOR SECTION 15_DORMER DETAIL Scale 114"=V-0" N c) o o 0 � 4 V./ a °° M o CJ w • r 4 o d o 0 cid u o a v N v, -zt CN /0 U O L LLI Z .LQJ LL w ��a J M l'-- U O IZ— (D N -4 CIO J U) 0�z. x0yo uj ® CJ � 0 z � Lu o 0 W Q L.L Y N Q_ uj 0 0- 0 Z 0 X J h H I w w Cn Cn z w J M m rn C� e > w U- O O w U) Ln D Ix m m 0 U) Cn W Cn X X X J J J 2 m m m > > W m w C2 O N 7 C�! CV � W O 0 0 CD CD N CD N CDO N N J W Q' m a a Cj z CD ea o O 0 U � toz " W ch Q � rw� 0 w 0 (L 0 0 U ) , I INDEX SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY I SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01310 m PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SECTION 01320 m CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 04700 - MANUFACTURED MASONRY SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS .� SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES SECTION 07412 - METAL WALL PANELS SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 0831.1 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SECTION 08800 - GLAZING SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09900 - PAINT AND WALL FINISHES SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS SEC110N 01100 - SUMMARY PART I 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS . A. Project Identification: Publix at Zephyr Commons; I . Project Location: Kossick Rd & US Highway 30 1, Zephyr Hills, FL (Pasco County). 2. Owner: Primerica Group One, Inc. � B. The Work consists of Publix front canopy and adjacent sidewalk only. This work to be coordinatea ,vith Publix shell and interior work as well as with adjacent retail buildings. C. Pro . ect will be constructed under a -eneral construction contract. i Z-1 1.2 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Work shall be conducted in one phase. I . Work shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within calendar days of the Notice to Proceed. 1.3 USE OF PREMISES . A. General: Conti -actor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Pr -ect site, during , oj construction period, Contractor's use of premises is hi-nited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other ' contractors on portions of Project. B. Cooperate fully with .separate contractors so work oil those contracts may be Carried Out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. 1.4 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A� Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-divislon format and In CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" nunibermg system. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. END OF SECTION 01 100 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PA RT I - 1.1 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplernental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.2 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract 'Time. If necessary, the description will include supple- mental or revised Drawings and Specifications. Z-1 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 14 days, or as indicated after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjust- ments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of pur- chases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b . Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use avail- able total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change, I . Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a com- C, plete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires sub- stitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709. D. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization. I . Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from informa- tion in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower -priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.3 CHANGF. ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contrac- tor on AIA Document G701. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Con- � struction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. i. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in tht Work. It also designates ' method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Tirne. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. I . After cornpletion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and ' time adjustments to the Contract. END OF SECTION 01250 SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART I - 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES I A, Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor s Construction Sched- ule. I . Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Submittals Schedule and Application for Payment forins with Continuation Sheets. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line iterns for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. I . Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. I ) 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 per- cent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indi- cated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. I . Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Applica- tion for Payment involve additional requirements. B . Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for for Payment. C. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. I . Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. D. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. I . Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. E. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a niechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the . payment. I . Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit �,,aivers. � 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien for construe- tion period covered by the application. a. Submit final Application for Payment with or precedcd by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with .submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: I . List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. Copies of building permits. 7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having 'urisdiction for performance of the Work. 8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. I Z1j 9. Performance and payment bonds. 10. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, subinit. all Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work, claimed as substantially complete. I . Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing all i L, accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 1� This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occu- _. paricy of designated portions of (fie Work. 14. Final Pavrnent Application: Submit final Application for Paynient with releases and supporting documentation not . previously submitted and,accepted, including, but not limited,, to the following: I . Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and . si llar obligations were paid. in 1 3. Updated finalstatement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Surn. V 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, LA measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. END OF SECTION 01290 SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART I - 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: I . General Project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Project meetings. Z, 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. I . Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. I . Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other con- struction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: I . Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 1.3 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. I . Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superinten- dent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Pr 'ect and authorized to conclude matters relating to oj the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect the progress and completion of the Work. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that i requires coordination with other construction or as specifically requested elsewhere in the Construction Documents. I . Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installa- tion and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration. Discuss and resolve all items related to the activity to be performed. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest fea- sible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. I . Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of signifi- cance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each i i i activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Sched- ule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent ' ' ' ' i i activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revi- sions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. END OF SECTION 01310 SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART I - 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: I . Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit 3 copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: I . Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Sectio.i number and title. 3. Name of subcontractor. 4. Description of the Work covered. 5. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit 2 printed copies of initial schedule, one a reproducible print and one a blue- or black -line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. . I . I I PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubinittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construe- * tion Schedule. 2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL " - , A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for cow-','o-licement of the Work to date of Substantial Comple tion. B. Activities: 'Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: I . Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Archl- tect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurerrient process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division I Section "Submittal Pro- cedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submit- tals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include number of days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administi-ative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Docurnerits and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. . I . Phasing: Arrange list ofactivittes on schedule by phase. �rl I -act. �. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contl 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect on the schedule of the following: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Use of premises restrictions. e. Provisions for future construction. f. Seasonal variations. 9. Environmental control. 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not lirnited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -chart -type, Contractor's Construe- ' Lion Schedule within 30 days of date established the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construe- tion Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. PART3- EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At intervals appropriate to the construction, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. �) I . Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting . and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. agencies, I . Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the sarne parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer . involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART I - 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Sam- ples, and other miscellaneous submittals. 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. I . Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including tirne for resubmittals, as follows. Time for ' review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. I . Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Allow 14 days for processing each resubmittal. 4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough ill advance of the Work to pert -nit processing. C. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. I . Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project narne, b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. 9. Name of manufacturer. It. Unique identifier, including revision number. . I . Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. . . Drawing number and detail references, as appropri i i ate. k. Other necessary identification. D. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. E. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncom- pliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. F. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review received from sources other than Contractor or for items that do not require submittals in the Contract Documents. I . Include Contractor's certification stating that the information submitted has been reviewed and complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G8 I 0. G. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. I . Number of Copies: Submit 3 copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return 2 copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2. Complete Submittals: Submit complete submittals in accordance with submittal schedule. The architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal until remaining information required in that section or division is provided. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. I . If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Proj ect- specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: I . Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units show- ing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side. 4. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 5. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of con- struction associated with each set. E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. F. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CS1 Form 1.5A or slinllar format suitable to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. ,-,',.Iote corrections and field dimen- sions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval starnp. Include Project narne and location, submit- tal number, Specification Section title and number, nan-1c of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and staternent certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return then] with- out action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or inodifications required, and return it. Architect will starnp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. C. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 0 1 330 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS - PA RT I 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract DOCUT-Dent requii-einejits. I I I . Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control procedures that facill- tate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having Jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements, Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, ot operation; they are not Samples. Mockups estab- lish the standard by which the Work will be judged. An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the sarne as testing agency. 1.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. I . If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Delegated- Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned Zn to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in com- pliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in perform- ing these services. B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: I . Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. ' 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations cm retesting and reinspecting. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-servicc. performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce requirod ull' its. B. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: Ali authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in mate- rial, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of suc- cessful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. ' E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those perfon-ned for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those ' indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. I . Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, nor . I I I I I nterfere with local trade-un'on jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. * G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indi- cated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. I . Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having Jurisdiction, when they so direct. � C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -author lized service representative to inspect field - assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. i esponsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide quali- fied personnel to perform required tests and inspections. I . Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during perfor- mance of its services. 2. interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or devi- ates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any por- tion of the Work. 5. . Do not perform any duties of Contractor. END OF SECTION 01400 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART I - 1.1 SUMMARY j A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facill- ties, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: I . Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. i 3. Sanitary fact lities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water facilities. . I 4. Electric power service. 5. Lighting. 6. Telephone service. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, tK., following: I . Project identification and temporary signs. I? Field offices. 3. Temporary stairs. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not firmted to, the following: I . EDvironi-nental protection. 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 5. Fire protection. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for ternporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not lirruted. to, the following: I . Owner's construction forces. 11 - Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. 'Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. . B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage, by all parties engaged in construction, at Project site. In , C. Water Service: Pay water service use charge,,, whether metered or otherwise, for water used by all entities engaged in * construction activities at Project site. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power Service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A� Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA241. 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric ser- vice. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ?. I EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combi- nation of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures in quantities and locations determined by regula- tion of any authority having jurisdiction. I . Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. C. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material in quantities and locations determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdiction D. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Drinking -water fountains or Contalnerized, tap -dispenser, bottled -water drinking -water units, including paper cup supply in quantities and locations determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdic- . tion E. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of I I 0- to 120-V plugs into higher -voltage outlets; equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. F. Power Distribution Systern Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and . equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. I . Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before ternporary utility is available, provide trucked - in services. B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be dis- charged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If iielther sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove aod dispose o' effluent off -site -*it a lawful nianneT. i . I C. Water Service: Illstall water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until per- manent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 13� -d 2 i 2 - . _1� � IF E .8 a ; e. , E E I . rot IL/2 11-1 rm" b n 0 r, -. Cn � U ;_4 ,--4 � U pm� &) 't� U _+_J = W - U ;., t C) �_) P--� p -,2 r$.1 _, 0 C:8 * "t-0, 91 r �.) � -t= 4� 'M a ?_4 '9 U Cn 4. +_J o3 6 rj:�U +-A .,_� ;:I 4 r.) U � 1% �� C3 = - CD = 0 0_ =3 0 %-- (D (Z �_- I (0 0 UJ co Z co -= < < .-i 0 15 I-L. cc 0 0 - LU U_ � .. M E < - < - = M �� Z 0'> � i.- M C\1 10 < Z co �_ !-Y J 0 . �, I : , , � , , � I I �, I � I I I I I , , , , 1�t 00 " 8rn " C� �� - e"c -6 Iq 5 r-, = _r� lzt 0 � 6 �T, a - .� C, �� E 8 � 8 &G a Iq 00- � r- 0 A� ,= § - W),q C14 �s �� CLA 1._11_1,__, ��`, " I I -, �, � I , , , I 11 , '�' � � � I � : � : : :: , . 1� ,I I z : : I , .11 � :� , : : :� : :: : : Z ,� : � I ; Z � �' 1 k, � � . 1. I I , , � � " , I ,. :1, ,� (/) �' �, = , � : I , I . 2 , � 1 -1--i �, (10 � .1 0 �, , %+- I : 1 .- I C-) (1) 0- (JD �11 I � :>,� I �,� 0- . Z 0 � , = M : 0 , X I I 11 W -0 �. ._J != =3 �_ i- UJ 0- LU = ICn ______J 1i i., �11, - , I , fln "I _%.0 Z 5; CD 1 4CZ, , M - M %. M �-;; ,:� =�� "a%- Z < LU CC � rt > __J LU L.L �_ ** \� � _______1 U) I I � I 11 I - - , , I I 1, I � Z 0 Z 0 i__ " U) I Z � FJ5 Ln E;5 U) 0 cr ME � 0 0- 0- C_ a_ CO C�, CO C\J co 7 ,It 7 I I I 1 r__ r_ r,- co �2C�- C\1 C> cli C) CM C�l C\1 LU _J W I It I I I I I I I I r Z- 6 I I ��11 " & ., . 16 I �i �, , - ,I �ff & � T b 11 I = I < Z rl- �� 6 i- �'- C? a � 0 M C) Z M W M W ,�D C� N:f :� 0 3 CD W M :>7- .. Yf C\1 C> 3: --J C-) . 0 !R 9 0 LLJ 00 :: �: re = 0 LQ_ ____o 0 0 c 0 i __J PUBLIX CANOPY PACKAGE PCAOO 1 E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. I . Maintain a minirrium temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal con- struction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity, . G. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload -protected disconnecting means, automatic ground -fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction opera- ' tions and traffic conditions. 1. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common -use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. I . Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with modem in each field office. 2. Provide an answering machine on superintendent's telephone. 3. Provide a facsimile machine for site use 4. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access, making them accessible for handicap access where required by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Per- sonnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B . Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. I . Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 2. Construct signs of exterior -type Grade B-B high -density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thick- nesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative -treated wood or steel. 3. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior -grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. C. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undam- aged at time of acceptance. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contarnina- i tion or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B . Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade con- struction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming." E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally ade- quate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of pos- * i sible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. . . I I I F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migra- tion and to separate areas from fumes and noise. G. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, -Install and maintain tem- porary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 24 1. I . Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above. Store cornbustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations. 2. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire -protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire -exposure areas. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been . I replaced by authorized use of a permanent f -:I*ty, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, i restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair dairiaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. I . Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove ternporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving, Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contarninated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, arid sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, Z71 3. At Substantial Cornpletion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period, Comply ' with final cleaning requirements i.n Division I Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative arid procedural requirements for contract closeout, Including, but not limited to, L� the following: I . Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. I . Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, arid reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and sirni- lar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's narne and inodel number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of change- i over in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit tesUadjusUbalance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities frorn Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and sirm- Zn lar elements. IL Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is com- pleted or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: I . Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division I Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or cor- rected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certifi- cate will be issued. I . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is com- pleted or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit 3 copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction i operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CST Form 14. 1 A. I . Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first, 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, arid building systems. . 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents frorn deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B . Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. I . Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or sirmlar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing con- cealed installations. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for differ- ent categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identifi- i cation where applicable. 4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prom- inent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identifi- ' cation on cover sheets. C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for mis- cellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file rniscella- neous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in indi- vidual Specification Sections and as follows: I . Operation Data: Include ernergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, arid sequence of operations. 2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance procedures, manite- nance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance, and copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the * covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where com- mencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. I . Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to con- dition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance prograrn. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. I . Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Com- pletion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign subst.-es. Avoid disturbing, natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflec- ' tive surfaces to their origi-al condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from hinited access spaces, including roofs, plenurns, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and sirnilarspaces. 9- Sweep concrete floors broom -clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris arid excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. , 1. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing com- pounds and other noticeable, v1sion-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish rrurrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. , j- Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up arid otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or res- * toratioll. 21) 1) Do not paint over "UL" arid similar labels, including mechanical arid electrical narneplates. 1� Wipe surfaces of mechanical arid electrical equipment and sirnilar equipment. Remove exces's lubrica- tion, paint arid mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. M. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. Z:1 n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water expo- sure. 0. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, regis- ters, arid grills. ' p� Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, arid reflectors to function wl di full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dirnmed by hours of use, and defective and. noisy starters in fluorescent arid mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. q, Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. B. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or exces's materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials frorn Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART]- 1.1 SUMMARY . A. This Section includes soil treatment for terinite control, I.-) SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated, including EPA -Registered Label. B. Product certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having juris- diction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Soil Termiticide Special Warr anty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by applicator and Contractor, certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMITE CONTROL A. Soil Treatment: EPA -registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a solu- ble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. I . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin. b. Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care. C. DowElanco, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL TREATMENT APPLICATION A. Apply soil treatment at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each,specific use, according to the product's EPA -Registered Label. I . Mix termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. 2. Apply to produce a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone around and under i building construction. DI stribute the treatment evenly. 3. Slabs -on -Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground- supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 4. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of . i interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottorn of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 5. Crawtspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 6. Masonry: Treat voids. 7. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground- supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construc- tion activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PARTI- 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including reinforcement, Concrete materials, mix design, placement pro- cedures, and finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Include details of steel reinforcement placement including material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup i spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports. D. Material test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Comply with ACT 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless modified by the require- ments of the Contract Documents. I . General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and protection of in - place concrete. 2. Formwofk and form accessories. 3. Steel reinforcement and supports. 4. Concrete mixtures. 5. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Formwork: Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACT 301. B. Steel Reinforcement: I . Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Concrete Materials: L Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. 2. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 1/4-inch nominal size. 3. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330. 4. Water: Complying with ASTM C 94. � D. Admixtures: I . Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Types A, D, F or G. If "F", see 2.2A. E. Vapor.Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than I 0 mils thick. F. Preformed Joint -Filler: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber. I G. Curing Materials: I . Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, rnonomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh con- crete. 1 2. Moisture -Retaining Cover- ASTM C 17 1, polyethylene film. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane- Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 2.2 CONCRETE MIXES A. Comply with ACT 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Prepare design inixes, proportioned according toACI 301, for normal -weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: I . Compressive Strength (28 Days). 2. Slump: 4 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Forrnwork: Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACT 301. B. Vapor Retarder: Install, protect, and repair vapor -retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with lonaest dimension parallel with direction of pour. L, I . Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape, C. Steel Refflforcement: Comply with CR.SFs "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting Zn 0 * reinforcement. I . Donot cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage arid reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. C� , 1). Joints: Constructjoints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. I , Construction Joints: Locate and install so as not to impair strength or appearance of concrete, at locations, indi- cated or as approved by Architect. 1). -ormed 'oint filler at 'unctions with slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such as Isolation Joints: Install pref I J column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, to full width and depth of joint, terminat- ing flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas ' as indicated. Construct contraction Joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: a. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diarnond- rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface arid before concrete develops random contraction cracks. E. Tolerances: Comply with ACT 11 7, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3 2) CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with recommendations in ACT 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, arid placing concrete. B. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. 3.3 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Forined Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, arid fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 Inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. I . Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. ' ' B. Smooth -Formed Fin I sh: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and sym- metrical manner with a trunimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Completely remove fins and other projections. i I . Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Apply grout -cleaned finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth -formed finished concrete. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treat- ment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACT 302. 1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. i B . Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface, C. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finish, unless otherwise indicated. D. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. E. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system. F. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a Donslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete frorn premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection, and follow recommendations in ACT 305R for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions occur before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing, C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days as follows: i I . Curing Compound: Apply urnforinly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufac- turer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, per- form tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests will be perforined according to ACT 301. 1 . Testing Frequency: One composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. END OF SECTION 03300 SECTION 04700 - MANUFACTURED MASONRY Part 1 - General I .01 Summary A. Section Includes: Manufactured stone veneer, Manufactured stone trim, and application materials. B. Related Sections: I . Division 05, or 06 Section specifying weather resistant barrier over framed walls. 2. Division 07 Section specifying flashing materials. 3. Division 09 Section specifying portland cement plastering. 1.02 References A. American Concrete Institute (ACT). B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): I . ASTNI C 39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 2. ASTM C 67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 3. ASTM C 177, Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded- Hot- Plate Apparatus. 4. ASTM C 192, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 5. ASTM C 270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 6. ASTM C 482, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 7. ASTM D 226, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. C. International Code Council (ICC): I . ES Report. 2. UBC Standard No. 14- 1, Kraft Waterproof Building Paper. D. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) of The Masonry Society. E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): I . Listing in Material Approval Guido. 2. UL 723, Standard for Safety for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.03 Submittals A. Reference Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures; submit following items: I . Product Data: Manufactured masonry and application materials including mortar color charts, and weather resistant barrier. 2. Samples: Panel containing full-size samples of specified manufactured masonry showing full range of colors and textures complete with specified mortar. a. Actual size of masonry sample approximately 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm). 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualifications: I ) Proof of manufacturer qualifications. 2) Proof of installer qualifications. b. Certificates: ICC-ES Report. c. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals; submit following items: , I I . Maintenance Instructions. 2. Special Warranties. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Minimurn five years experience in producing manufactured masonry. b. Member of following organizations: 1) MSJC. 2) ACT. 3) ASTM. 2. Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry ' including minimum 5 projects within 400 mile radius of this Project. B. Certifications: 1. Current ICC-ES Re-ort. 1 1 Florida Product App.-oval Number. 1.05 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Reference Spec Section for Product Storage and Handling Requirements. B. Follow manufacturer's instructions. C. Store rnoisture-sensitive materials in weather protected enclosures. 1.06 Project/SITE Conditions A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of installation at minirnum 40 degrees F (4 degrees, C) prior to, during, arid for 48 hours following installation. 1.07 Warranty I A. Special Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard hrmted warranty against defects in manufacturing for a period of 50 years following date of [Substantial Completion] [Final Acceptance], 1.08 Maintenance A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra manufactured stone material in a variety of shapes arid sizes in quantity equal to three percent of the installed stone. Part 2 - Products 2.01 Manufacturer A. Owens Corning Tel: (419) 248-8000 One Owens Corning Parkway Fax: (419) 325-3995 Toledo, OH 43659 Website: www.culturedstone.com B. Substitutions: None permitted. 2.02 Manufactured masonry Materials A. Cultured Stone" Textures: I . Single Texture: -Country Ledge Stone, Chardormay (CSV-20006) B. Architectural Trim: I . Watertable/Sill-Stone Textured: a. Color: Buckskin, SWT 1371 b. Size: 2 (front), 2-1/2 (back), by 3 by 18 inches (50 (front), 65 (back) by 75 by 455 mm). Provide sloped top surface and drip edge. C. Manufactured Masonry Physical Properties: I . Compressive Strength: ASTM C 192 and ASTM C39, 1800 psi ( 1 2.4 MPa), 5 specimen average, 1500 psi (10.3 MPa) minimum for individual unit. 2. Bond Between Stone Unit, Type S Mortar, and Backing: ASTM C 482, 50 psi (345 kPa). 3. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177, R-factor, 0.355 per inch (25.4 min) of thickness. 4. Freeze/Thaw: ASTM C 67, no disintegration and less than 3 percent weight loss. 5. Fire Hazard Test, UL 723: a. Flame spread: 0. b. Smoke Development: 0. 6. Maximum Veneer Unit Weight: 15 psf (73 kg/ml). 2.03 related materials A. Weather Resistant Barrier: [Kraft waterproof building paper, UBC Standard No. 14- 1 ] [No. 15, Type 1, asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D 226]. B. Metal Lath: [2.5 lb (1.4 kg/M2) galvanized expanded metal lath] [ 1 8 (1.3 mm) gauge woven wire mesh] [3.4 lb (1.8 kg/M2) galvanized expanded rib lath]. C. Fasteners: I . Into Metal Studs: Minimum 7/16 inch (I 1. I mm) head diameter, corrosion -resistant , self -drilling, self tapping, pancake head screws of sufficient length to penetrate 3/8 inch (10 mm) minimum into the stud. D. Mortar: Premixed Type N or mortar mixed using components and proportions following manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with ASTM C 270. 1 . Mortar Color: Iron oxide pigments. Part 3 - Execution 3.01 Examination A. Examine substrates upon which manufactured masonry will be installed. B. Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions. C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.02 Preparation A. Protection: Prevent work from occurring on the opposite of walls to which manufactured masonry is applied during and for 48 hours following installation of the manufactured masonry. B. Surface Preparation: Follow manufacturer's instructions designated below for the appropriate type of manufactured masonry and substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install Cultured Stone' products in accordance with manufacturer's Cultured Stone' installation instructions using grouted joints. B. Install architectural trim products in accordance with manufacturer's Cultured Stone' installation instructions. 3.04 field quality control A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide 3 periodic site visits, each of approximately one hourduration. 3.05 Cleaning A. Reference Spec Section for Cleaning and Waste Management. B. Clean manufactured masonry in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.06 Protection A. Protect finished work from rain during and for 48 hours following installation. B. Protect finished work from darnage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 04700 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PARTI- 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: I . Integral color split -face concrete masonry units with integral water repellant. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. B. Samples: Showing the full range of colors arid textures available for exposed masonry units and colored mortars. C. Material Test Reports: For each type of masonry unit, mortar, and grout required. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements in ACT 530. 1. B. Hot -Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Exposed Masonry Units: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1 . Unit Compressive Strength: 1900-psi minimum, average net -area compressive strength. 2, Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Type: 11, nonmoisture-controlled units. 4. Exposed Faces of Decorative Units: Normal -weight aggregate, split -face finish ' 5. Special Shapes: Provide for lintels, corners, iambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 6. Water Repellant Admixture: In addition to other constituants previously exstablished as suiatble for use in con- crete masonry conforming to ASTM standards, all units shall be manufactured with an integtral water repellant * admixture. The integral water repellant admixture shall be certified, by the admixture manufacturer, with the wall showing no visible water when tested in accordance with ASTM E514-90. 7. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide concrete masonry units from the following: a. Demaco. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, except Type III may be used for cold-weathef construction. B . Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 1 . Products: a. Blue Circle Cement; Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement. b. Lafarge Corporation; Lafarge Mortar Cement. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. E. Pigmented Mortar: Colored cement or cement -lime formulation as required to produce the color indicated. I . Colored Masonry Cement: a. Products: 1) Blue Circle Cement; Magnolia Masonry Cement. 2) Essroc Materials, Inc.; Brixment-in-Color. 3) HoInam, Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement. . F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for Joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with I 00 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Water: Potable. 24 - REINFORCING A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcernerlt: ASTM A 95 1; mill galvanized, carbon -steel wire for interior walls and hot -dip galva- nized, carbon -steel wire for exterior walls. I . Single-Wythe Masonry: Use either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods arid cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Steel Frame: Two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension arid compression forces perpendicular to wall. I . Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch diameter, galvanize,d steel wire anchor section for welding to steel. I 1), � Tie Section: Tri angular-sh aped wire tie, sized to extend within I inch of masonry face, made from 0. 1875-inch- diameter, galvanized steel wire. D. Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but ' ' resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall. I . Anchor Section: Dovetail anchor section formed frorn 0.0528-inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet. 1). I -shaped wire tie, sized to extend within I inch of masonry face, made from 0. 1875-incli- Tie Section: Triangular diameter. ,-1,11vanized steel wire. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded fillerstrips complying with ASTM D l 056, Grade 2A 1; cornpressible Lit) to 35 per- cent; formulated from neoprene. � B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to rnaintain lateral stability it) masonry wall. Made from styrene-bUladiene-rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. b C. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate arid 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in I gal. of water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wet- ting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: I . For conspicuous vertical and horizontal lines, such as external corners, doorjarribs, reveals, and expansion and control Joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, rnovement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using les s-than-half- size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern indicated; do not use units with less than * nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or iambs. C. Fill cores in hollow concrete rnasonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: I . With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. * B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless oth- erwise indicated. 3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a mimmurn of 6 inches, B. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using pref,qbricated "L" and "T" sections. 3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the follow- ing: I . Provide an open space not less than I inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joint,s and attached to struc- ture. 3.6 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units CA ,z �, " $:� W) C) �= r, "El cn, 0 U �.4 ,M � U 9L� I ID 1� U _+_J = C) rA - ;_-� 0 �) a) a P_� W 9 �. a Q�,-4 E, b.0 0 ' ri �) �4 -@ 0 rEE4 'C -9 �11 Cn C�l 4-)4 C U 1:� -+-) r .,-4 ;:t 4 0 U ;_4 �< ,% 1111- "� , , , , I I I I , , , , -, I - , , � � � , , I � I � , , , I I I , I I , - I - I I '. I II I I I I I ;1 II � � I :1 �I , I " - " , " " K , , , '. " K �� , :.<� � �� > � � "I � , , , , 1, I .I11 � I - , ,� 6 = , , , I I - - �111� (1) . C= 0 0- =3 0 I.- 0 (10 ,c2 . (.0 : LU : co : 0 Z C') : . < < . = -1 4W 0 9 � < 'r < 0 LLI 0 ELJ M E < - .11 < -= �< ,I I Cl- O,j 2 ,I I �_ (.0 � Z 0- R g I 1, LU � :3 1 1 I-) I" ,It ;8 eq �s rn -4 0� W. _-; 6"D _C� . 9 161 � lzt - X 0 PT, . U �-, C) � CR p 8 � 8 91, � G - Z ID. 0 . I PI-1 t- 0 . (= . kr) "T C14 0� _C� rL, W C 0 _1�� CZ . 0 I" I . " 0 (2) CL C0 >-. 0_ 0 C= CZ C) X . I LU -0 _J F- =3 F- I- LU CL Ld = U) , ' I. "' � - I I . - - 4 7 , I I "I I U) 1 Z 11C 41� 6. 5 CD LU CY3 -1 �L Cc M el ,� *�� Z < LIJ Cc: 46 1-1.�. � �> __J LIJ LL- �_ W - , � , " �� , \ , I I � � .\ , I I I Z Z F- 11 � � . 9 C) LU W U) U) 10 �Q SQ cr � :2 0 �!5 x X L: _J _:i -:i :E Q_ a- 0- D_ co 00 OC) 11:t � . (Z�'i r_1 r_1 f-I 00 (1) CD C> C) C> C\1 C\J C\1 C\i ;� W W I I I I I I I "I I -"--,-" , \� \ \� , , , , , \ , , I I �, � I b I " Z r__ ", !�? C? 0 � �3 co C�l W W C-0 C� M Ir �!e ., , C� W M _J 0 � ': 0 C\J �_ C) CD W co I , W �e _C � I a- C5 rl 0 � I I - I PUBLIX CANOPY PACKAGE PCA002 - - . I . . � - ,_ . '. . . . . � - . '. . . . . n - . ,. . . . � - . - .1 . . � -, . . . -1 I . . - I - . I . _ - . .... 1. . I . - . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . : - - I I..... � - . � .. - - . I . . , .7 , � : I � . .. . r I �* I i - I . I .. . - I :* . . . I � . . . .. . 'r I � . q - ---__--�-��-A---- - -- - ��_ ____._ , ---"., - -- -_ I / ,_____f_" �� t____�_ ,_ -- "� f ____� � I i , � , ,_7 . . . - . - .. % . . .. � - . . � - .. � . . . _. - .. . . . . . -, . . . -, - - .... 1 . . . .. . .... . ... . . �-�-,---L_,,-,----__"__ . _____� �'..`_ " : � z.: I - - - . . - .. . . . I. - - . . . .... �. I . __ __f�� I i I in color, texture, and cornpressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality -control testing indicated below. I . Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in these subparagraphs will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. 2. Mortar: Properties will be tested per ASTM C 780. 3. Grout: Sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. 3.8 PARGING A. Parge predampened masonry walls, where indicated, with Type S or Type N mortar applied in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch with a steel -trowel finish. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. Damp -cure parging for at least 24 hours. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean unit masonry by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints, as work progresses. END OF SECTION 04810 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PARTI- 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Pipe bollards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to other Work. B. Templates: For anchor bolts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: I . Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTNI A 36/A 36M. 2. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 3. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTNI A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. . 4. Rolled- Stainless- Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. 5. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. 6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by struc- tural loads. 7. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold -formed metal channels 1-5/8 by 1-518 inches with flange edges returned toward web and with 9/16-inch- wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches o.c. Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTNI A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.079-inch nomi- nal thickness. 8. Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6. I . 2.2 PAINT I A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664 and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Connections, General: Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Shear and punch metals cleanly arid accurately. Remove burrs. 1). i I I Weld corners arid seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes. 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate Joints where least conspicuous. B� Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Fabricate steel frarning and supports that are not a part of structural -steel frarnework as necessary to complete the Work froni structural steel of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. Z� I . Where indicated to be cast into concrete or built into rnasonry, equip with integrally welded anchors at 24 inches O.C. 2. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where wood nallers are attached to airders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches o.c. Zn 3. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel baseplates and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness. C. Pipe Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION . A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in -place construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, i with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. I . Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or sirni- far construction. 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections, unless otherwise indicated. Do not weld, cut, or abrade galvanized surfaces. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing mernbers have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. END OF SECTION 05500 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PARTI- 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Wood blocking. 1) �. Wood nallers. 3. Wood sheathing. 4. Plywood backing panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. I . Factory rnark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark grade starnp on end or back of each piece. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 1. 5 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Structural Panels: I . FRT Plywood: DOC PS I . 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). B. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: I . Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection i with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocUag, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in Contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over Concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant- treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with performance require- rnents in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fi re -retardant- treated wood with appropriate clas- sification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing arid inspecting agency accept- able to authorities having jurisdiction. I Zn I , Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood. 2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provi- sions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non- Load- Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: I . Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. C. Exposed Framing: Hand select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics that would impair finish appearance. I . Species and Grade: As indicated above for load -bearing construction of same type. 2. Species and Grade: Hem -fir or Hem -fir (north), Select Structural grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Species and Grade: Southern pine, Select Structural No. I grade; SPIB. 4. Species and Grade: Spruce -pine -fir or Spruce -pine -fir (south), Select Structural No. I grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.5 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. B. Paper -Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 79/C 79M, with water-resistant material incorporated into core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core's face, back, and long edges. I . Manufacturers: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation. C. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch and Type X, 5/8 inch thick as indicated oil drawings. C. Glass -Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. I . Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens -Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch and Type X, 5/8 inch thick as indicated on drawings. D. Extruded -Polystyrene- Foam Wall Sheathing: ASTNI C 578, Type IV, in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths with tongue -and -groove or shiplap long edges as standard with manufacturer. I . Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). C. Owens Corning. d. Tenneco Building Products, E. FRT Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior sheathing. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTNI A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. C. Building Paper: Asphalt -saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperfo- rated. PART 3 - EXECUTION . 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate [furring,] nailers, blocking, and similar sup- ports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. - B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber and plywood. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the follow- ing: 1. CABO NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. D. Apply bulil-.�g paper horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap. ' E. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. . Zn END OF SECTION 06100 SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB PART]- 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Class PB exterior insulation and finish systern (EIFS) applied over CMU or Glass -Mat Gypsurn Sheathing Board. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Class PB EIFS: Comply with performance characteristics in EIMA's EIMA Guideline Specification for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB, I . Impact Resistance: Standard and Ultra -High. 1 Positive arid Negative Wind -Load Performance: Capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per Zn ' ASTM E 330. Provide test reports indicating compliance with wind load standard of authority having jurisdic- ' tion over all substrates indicated. 13 SUBN41TTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, terminations, fasteners, arid attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each EIFS and for each color and texture required. D. Field quality -co n trot test reports. E. Product test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS through one source from a single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. . C. Fire -Test- Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide EIFS and system components identical to those of EIFS and system components tested per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency Z� acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire -Resistance Characteristics: ASTNI Ell 9. 2. Full -Scale Fire Test: Tested rnockup per ASTM E 108. 3. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268. Surface -Burning Charac- teristics: Insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and finish coats with flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 450 or less, per ASTNI E 84. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. I . Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at tirne of Substantial Comple- tion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I . Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Senergy Inc.; SKW-MBT Construction Chemicals. 3. Sto Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish -coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by FIFS manufacturer for Project. B. Substrate: Glass -Mat gypsum sheathing boardASTM C931/C 931 at thickness indicated on drawings from the follow- ing manufacturer. I . G-P Gypsum Corporation, Dens -Glass Gold Sheathing. C. Water-iWeather-Resistive-Barrier Coating: Formulation arid accessories designed for indicated use. D. Primer/Sealer: Substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation. F� Spacers: Furring strips; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, F. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: Factory-i-nixed adhesive recommended by system manufacturer. i G. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements, ASTM C 578 for Type 1, and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board." H. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali -resistant, open -weave glass -fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials and complying with EIMA 105.01 and ASTM D 57 8. 1 . Standard -Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 2. Heavy -Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 20 oz./sq. yd. 3. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. 4. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 5. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. 1. Base -Coat Materials: Standard mixture: Manufacturer's standard. J. Waterproof Adhesive/B ase- Coat Materials: Waterproof mixture. K. Primer: Factory -mixed elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base -coat surface for application of finish coat. L. Finish -Coat Materials: Standard acrylic -based coating. I . Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings. M. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener suitable for substrate. N. Trim Accessories: Manufactured from UV -stabilized PVC and complying with ASTNI D 1784 and ASTNI C 1063. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1397 arid EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as appli- cable to each type of substrate indicated. B. Insulation: Adhesively or mechanically attach to substrate. I . Expansion Joints: Apply adhesive to insulation by notched -trowel method to coat entire surface of gypsum sheathing with adhesive once insulation is adhered to sheathing, unless system manufacturer's written instruc- tions specify using primer -sealer with ribbOD-and-dab method. Apply adhesive to a height of not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for factory mixed and not less than 3/8 inch (9.6 rnm) for field mixed, measured from surface of insulation board before placement. 1) - Install top surface of fastener head flush with plane of insulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates * . with minimum penetration according to ASTM PS 49 or system manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. Space fasteners according to system manufacturer's written recommendations. 3. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally and working upward. 4. Stagger vertical Joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insu- lation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offsetjoints not less than 6 inches (I 50 mm) from corners of window and door openings. a. Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from horizontal and 4 inches (100 mm) from vertical joints in sheathing. b. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 inches (I 00 mm) from horizontal Joints in sheathing. C. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 inches (I 00 mm) from aesthetic reveals. 5. Interlock ends at internal and external comers. 6. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces i without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material. 7. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying * with details indicated. 8. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mim) from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than I/ 1 6 inch (1.6 mm). 9. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at features to less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). 10. Install foam shapes attached to supporting substrate, where indicated. 11. Interrupt insulation at expansion joints. 12. Form Joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between insulation � edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encap- sulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 13. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within system and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width indicated. 14. Treat exposed edges of insulation board as follows: a. Wrap edges after installing insulation board and before applying field -applied reinforcing mesh. b. Wrap mesh of width required to extend not less than 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) onto substrate behind insula- tion board, cover insulation board edge, arid extend not less than 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) onto insulation board face. C. Wrap edges of insulation board, except those forming substrates of sealant joints, by encapsulating with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. d. Wrap edges of insulation board forming substrates of sealant joints within system or between system and other work by encapsulating with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 15. Treat edges of insulation board at trim accessories by extending base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat over face leg of accessories. C. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating. at locations indicated; where required by EIFS manufacturer; where expansion . ' ' joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction; at floor lines in multilevel wood -framed construction; and where wall height changes. D. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manu- facturer, but not less than I/ I 6-inch dry -coat thickness. E. Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additionai base -coat material if necessary, so i reinforcing -mesh color and pattern are not visible. F. Double -Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and second layer of standard . i impact reinforcing mesh. G . Double Base -Coat Application: Where indicated, apply in same manner and thickness as first application except with- out reinforcing mesh. H. Finish Coat: Apply maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manu- Z� ' factufer to produce a uniform finish of color arid texture matching a,pproved sample and free of cold. joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. 1. Joint -Sealant Installation: I . Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and in "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation arid Finish Systerns, Class PB." 3.2 WARRANTY A. Mall U facturer's standard material warranty (3-year minimum) from date of Owner Final Acceptance. END OFSECTION 07241 SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies organic felt arid fiberglass asphalt shingles. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Color of shingles: Selected by architect from contractor's submittal. ' B. Counterflashing and flashing of roof projections: Section 07600, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. C. Skylights, roof scuttles, ridge and roof vents, Section 07700, ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES. 1.3 SUMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS. B. Samples: Shingles, each type, color arid texture. C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1. Shingles, each type 2. Installation instructions 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with the manufacturer's brand and name clearly marked thereon. B. Shingle bundle wrapping shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. C. Store shingles in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Store roll goods on end in an upright position. D. Keep materials dry, covered corripletely and protected from the weather. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below form a part o this specificatiOD to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): D226-97 ..................................... Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing D 1 970-01 ................................... Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection D2178-97 ................................... Asphalt Glass Felt used in Roofing and Waterproofing D3018-03 ................................... Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules D3462-03 ................................... Asphalt, Shingles Made from Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules F 1 667-02 .................................... Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples C. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL): UL790-97 ................................... Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials . PART2-PRODUCTS A. Architectural shingle to be Grand Manor Shangle 425#, 1 1 0 MPH certified as manufactured by cerainteed. 2.1 SHINGLES A. Class A: (Fire resistive), per UL790. ASTM D3018, Type I and ASTM 3462, square butt for a maximum exposure of 125 mm (5 inches), headlap minimum 50 mm (2 inches), wind resistant, self sealing. Minimum weight: 10.3 Kg/sqm (21.0 lbs/100sft). 2.2 ROOFING NAILS A. ASTM F 1 667; Type 1, Style 20, galvanized steel, deformed shanks, with heads 9.5 mm to I I mm (3/8-inch to 7/16- inch) diameter. B. Use nails 32 mm (1-1/4 inches) long for shingles wid 19 mm (3/4-inch long) for felt. 2.3 ROOFING FELT A. "Ice and water shield" as manufactured by W. R. Grace. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Roof surfaces shall be sound, reasonably smooth and free from defects which would interfere with roofing installation. i B. Roof accessories, vent pipes and other projections through the roof must be in place and roof flashing installed or ready for installation before laying shingles. 3.2 LAYING A. Lay felt under shingles over entire roof. B. Install asphalt felt underlayment, lapping a rninimum of I 00 mm (four inches) at ends, 50 mm (2 inches) at head and 300 mrn (12 inches) over ridge. Extend felt 13 mm (1/2-inch) beyond edges of roof. Nail felt 125 mm (five inches) on centers along laps. - C. At eaves, install strip of 41 Kg (90 pound) mineral surface roll roofing not less than 460 mm (18 inches) wide and starter course of roof shingles with tabs reversed. Both shall overhang lower edge of roof 13 mm (1/2-inch). D. Lay shingles with maximum exposure of 125 mm (5 inches). Nail shingles in accordance with manufacturer's published directions. 3.3 METAL DRIP EDGES A. At rakes, install metal drip edges made of stainless steel specified under Section, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. Apply the metal drip edge directly over the underlayment along the rakes. B. Secure metal drip edges with compatible nails spaced not more than 250 mm (10 inches) on center along the inner edges. 3.4 FLASHINGS Provide metal flashings specified under Section, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL at the intersections of roofs, adjoining walls, or projections through the deck such as chirrineys and vent stacks. Give careful attention to the installation of all flashings. 3.5 RIDGE A. Bend each shingle lengthwise down center to provide equal exposure on each side of ridge. Beginning at one end of ridge, apply shingles with maximum 125 inm (5 inches) exposure. B. Secure each shingle with one nail on each .side, 210 min (8-1/2 inches) back from exposed end and one inch up from edge. 3.6 VALLEY FLASHING A. Install metal valley flashing shown and as specified under FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. B. Secure valley flashing in accordance with shingle manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Expose flashing in open portion of valley a minimum of 125 mm (5 inches) and lap the shingles over the flashing a minimum of 125 rnm (5 inches). END OF SECTION 07311 SECTION 07412 - METAL WALL PANELS PARTI- 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Factory -formed and fie] d-as sembled,expo sed-fastener, lap -seam metal wall panels. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses, based on testing according to ASTM E 330: B. Seismic Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earth- quake Loads. C. Wind Loads: Comply with wind load requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of metal wall panel and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal wall panels, including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. - . I I . I . � 1. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flash- ings, closures, and accessories. 2. Include technical data regarding fastening pattern required to meet wind load requirements into substrate indi- cated on drawings. C. Samples: For each exposed finish. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. I . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. � i i B. Special Warranty on Panel F1 m shes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty i period. I . Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot -dip process and cl i prepainted by the coll-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. I . AlUrninum-Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 or AZ55 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. . 3. Exposed Finishes: a. High -Performance Organic Finish (Prefinished) : Where panels are indicated to be pre -finished, finish material with two -coat, thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; coryiplying with physical properties and coatin performance in 9 i requirements of AAMA 2604, except as modified below: I ) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours. -)) Water Resistance: 1000hours, 4. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. 13� Panel Sealants: I � Sealant"I'ape: Pr,essure-sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with retease-paper backing, 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 1) alant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer. ,. Joint Se, 3. Butyl -Rubber -Based, Solvent -Release Sealant: ASTM C 131 1. 2.2 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M; regular, 1/2 inch Type X, 518 inch thick. B. Substrate -Board Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resis- i tance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to substrate. 1.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Steel Sheet Components, General: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirerrients for metal and with ASTM A 653/ A 653M, G40 (7120), hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Base or Sill Angles: 0.079-inch bare steel thickness, cold -formed, galvanized steel sheet. C. Hat--'haped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTNI C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets arid bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasten- ers designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. I . Fasteners for Wall Panels: Self -drilling of self -tapping 41 0 stainless or zinc -alloy steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.5 LAP -SEAM METAL WALL PANELS A. Exposed -Fastener, Lap -Seam Metal Wall Panels: Factory -formed, designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. I . Manufacturers: a. Berridge Manufacturing Company. b. MBCI; Div. of NCI Building Systems. C. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. d. Reynolds Metals Company. 2. Profile: Tapered rib or as indicated on Drawings. 3. Material: Metallic -coated steel sheet, 0.0159 inch. a. Exterior Finish Pre -finished to color indicated on drawings. b. Color: Match Architect's samples where applicable. 16 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, cop- ings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated. I . Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed -cell laminated polyethylene; mimmum I -inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel pro- file. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- thick, metallic -coated steel sheet. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, i jambs, corners, endwalls, framed open I ngs, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with saine finish system as adjacent metal wall panels. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufac- turer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. C. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protec- i tive covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3,1 PREPARATION A. Substrate Board: Install substrate board over wall sheathing on entire wall surface. Attach with substrate -board fas- teners. ' I . Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to direction of metal wall panel searns with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly buttsubstrate boards together. 2. Comply with UL requirements for fire -rated construction. B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing arid Trim." 3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. . Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. I . Field cutting of metal wall panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition. 5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 6. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic i action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubber] zed -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, Joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof perfor- mance of metal wall panel assemblies. I . Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape of sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. 2, Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage, to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. I . Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide conceaied fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, arid seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 4. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as ifietal wall panels are installed, unless oth- erwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean fiflished surfaces as recommendeO by met1-11 wall pa -el manufacturer, Maintain in a clean condition during con- struction. B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep hole� ,,And drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. END OF SECTION 07412 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM . PARTI- 1.1 � SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Manufactured reglets. 2. Formed roof drainage system. 3. Formed low -slope roof flashing and trim, 4. Formed steep -slope roof flashing and trilyi. 5. Fornied. wall flashing and trim, 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated, B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet rnetal flashing and trim. C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim upon request of the Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless morostringent requirements are indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS '). I �, MANUFACTURERS A . In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: I . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers Specified. 2 2 SHEET METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper Suitable for forming and structural perfor- i mance required, but not less than H 1 4, finished as follows: I . High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat, thermocured system containing not less than 70 percent polyvi- nylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. a. Color: Match Architect's samples B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, No. 2D fiflish. C Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality, i i mill phosphatized for field painting. D. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper -bearing lead sheet. - 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and 4, other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type 11 (No. 30), asphalt- saturated organic felt, nonperforated. C. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Nails for Copper Sheet: Copper or hardware bronze, 0. 109 inch (2.8 min) minimum and not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) long, barbed with large head. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. 3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 4. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless- steel rivets. D. Sealing Tape: Pressure- sensitive, I 00 percent solids, polyisobutylerie compound sealing tape with release -paper back- ing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifi- cations required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTNI C 131 1, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry filrn thickness per coat. 2.4 A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory- mitered and -welded corners and junc- tions. I . Manufacturers: a. Cheney Flashing Company, Inc. b. Fry Reglet Corporation. C. Heckmann Building Products Inc. 2. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custorn fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recornmendations in SMACNA's "Architec- ,_ ' � i tural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock searns. Form searns and seal with epoxy seam ' sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. a- -d 0 '5 f 2 . 0 � I E T �'D . 2! . ; I E � 2 0 rrA �, ,c " N _l 0 0 ;4 1 1= CD C5 4 CA U � ;_� I I Alz P.� 0 ,It U -+..i C� 1� .- 00 C-4 8 rn UrA �..4 ri ,- -� C) �=� 0 �) 6G -5 11C! r_l " �* �0) 0 q r-- C, � ,I- b-0 0� 2� 0 -9 0 �4 � r �_) 8 44 _@ - U �-. C) 0 rEE4 9 41 -e �� E - U un 8 -� 8 +-) ct u P�� C� 0 llc� I �r 0 P� C=) . +-.) r-�U " ,-� n '1� ON �= 1 4 - n, ;� U ;-.� U -e, %� (3 C I - CD ,I I t__ I z' 0 . . CL I = 0 L_ : : (D I CZ 00 0 W C13 zi, Z M -= < < i 0 (D < CC 00 LU E < 0 U, 2 < - <= Z �g M I.- 0- C, � 110 Z co �< I W 73 . 0 i (n �= 0 E E 0 0 %_ >_1 _= 0- CD - M < PI -A ,:, >_ n i 3: cc CZ= 0 U) __J =:) LJ_ �oe .6 C15 LLJ . L_-_ C� -J mi � M 1 < �� CE Z LD >_ �_ =3 CO = 0 M Cf) a- 1A 0 LIJ '3 �� r1i 0 Of 0- , U) = 0 1 -1-0 (Z 0 n__ 0 (D a- U) >1 0- 0 C (Z 0 X . W -0 J �- =3 �_ �- CLW W X_ U) - 1_111____1_ - , ""I I �, �.' , I � I , , 11 11 11 11 I , I I. �, ,I Z Z F- LU L) 0 U) W U) 0 LJ) LJ) Ir � :�i 0 a- a- CL CL m 00 00 .11- CD C\A - 7 r f �1 -1 1 - r__ 00 UJ C) CD C) C:) C\J C\j C\J C\J LU _J W � . W . I . . . * - I ` ��' , 1\ I 11 � 11 I -, � " I I I I I , b I Z r- F- !�' C? a 0 co C) LU W co C�l M If 3 (D UJ M __J �e 0 C> 0 0 :� � C\J UJ co " I = !R I . M I I I a- I In 0 0 1 PUBLIX CANOPY PACKAGE , PCA003 ) - . 7 � � t 1� Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpanslion but movable Joints In metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with j SMACNA recommendations. D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expan- 1 j ' s on oints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep, filled with elastom eric sealant concealed within . ' joints. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed -to -view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncor- rosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured. 2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long sections. Furnish flat -stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from sarne metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion j ints, expansion -Joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gut ol - ters. I . Fabricate from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.040 inch thick. B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. I . Fabricate downspouts from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.024 thick. C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. I . Fabricate parapet scuppers from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.0320 inch thick. D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes and built-in overflows. 1 . Fabricate conductor heads from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.0320 inch thick. 2.7 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- wide joint cover plates. 1. Fabricate from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch thick. B . Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fabri- . cate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of extemal leg and[ drill elongated holes for fasteners on] interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. I . Fabricate copings from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: I . Stainless Steel: 0.040 inch thick. D. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0320 inch > thick. E. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material as indicated on drawings: 1 . Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered. F. Roof -Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1 I . Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft. , hard. tempered. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous iterns as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. I . Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with biturninous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. , �� 0. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated, Provide uniform, neat seams with rninimurn exposure of solder, welds, and elastorneric sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimen- -ions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. s 1. Space cleats not more than 12 niches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of I 0 feet with no ,joints allowed within 24 inches of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type i expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intenrieshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep, filled with elastorneric sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less that) 3/4 inch for wood screws. I . Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic -Coated Steel: Use stainless -steel rasteners. i Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless -steel fasteners. 3. Copper: Use copper orstainless-steel fasteners. 4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless -steel fasteners. H. Seal Joints with elastorneric sealant as required for watertight construction. 1. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils, and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of I- 1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. I . Do not solder alurninurn sheet. 3.2 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTAI-LATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage iterns to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA 17, 1 recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drain- age system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped Joints sealed with elastomeric sealant. eD Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. . I . Install gutter with expansion joints at locations Indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps. 2. Install continuous gutter screens oil gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning gutters. C. Downspouts: Join sections with I- I /2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely I inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofingrnernbrane. E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim I inch (125 mm) below scupper dis- charge. 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Archi- tectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indi- cated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. B. Roof Edge Flashing and Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 and the authority having jurisdiction. C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Secure in a waterproof manner. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashingjoints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastorneric sealant. D. Roof- Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof- penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: I . Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seat with elastorneric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent I p ping. END OF SECTION 07620 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART I - 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following: I . Exteriorjoints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces. 2. Exterior 'oints in horizontal traffic surfaces. j 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 5. Firestop system through fire resistance - rated walls. 6. Exterior joints in sheet metal flashing and trim. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Firestop System Submittals: For each through- penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance with require- bj 1 ments for each condition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific Joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. B. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastorneric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint sub- strates using test method indicated in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article. C. Fire -resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E Il 9 under conditions where positi ive furnaces pressures of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials sur- rounding the penetrating iterns in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following require- ments: I . Fire -Resistive Rating of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another testing inspecting agency. D. Mockups: Before installing 'oint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities i of materials and execution. I . may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Comple- tion. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not meet requirements specified in this Section or fail in adhesion within specified warranty period two years from date of Final Acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: I . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with Joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected from manufacturer's full range. - 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealant: (Gutters & Coping Sealant) I . Products: a. Dow Corning; 795. b. GE Silicone, SilPruf. . C. Tremco Spectrern 2 B. Single- Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. For vertical masonry control joints, provide the following: a. Products: I ) Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChernRex Inc.; NP 1. 2) Tremco; Vulkem 116. 3) Sika Corporation; Sikaflex - Ia. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). C. Class: 25. 2. Exposure: Use T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 3. Substrates: Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. C. Urethane Sealant: I . Concrete paving joints, honi zontal traffic surfaces. a. Products: 1) Bostik, "Chem -Calk 950". 2) Sonneborn, "SL-l". 3) Tremco, Vulkem 45 b. Type and Grade S (singe component) and NS (nonsag). C. Class 25 d. Exposure: T (traffic). e. Substrate: 0 2.3 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through -penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, p * enetrating through -penetration firestop system under conditions of ser- vice and application, as demonstrated by through -penetration firestop system manufacturers based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through -penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and comply with "Performance Requirements" article. . Use only components specified through penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/darnmingibacking materials, include the following: a. Slat -/rock -wood -fiber insulation. b. Sealants in combination with other form ing/darnming/backing materials to prevent leakage of full mate- rials in liquid state. C. Fire -rated forrn board. . d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. . 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 6. Products: a. 3M Fire Prevention Products. b. Hilti Firestop Systems C. International Protective Coatings Corporation (IPC, a Division of W.R. Grace). d. Trernco Inc. 2 .4 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining,; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint filters; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: i I . Type: C (closed -cell material with a surf -'ace skin). C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recornmended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant -from adhering to rigid, inflexiblejonit-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of 'oint where Such adliesi Would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. j ion 2. 5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint sub- strates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B, Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent non - Porous Surfaces in any way, and formulated to prornote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and,surfaces adjacent to joints. � �__ 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Contractor performing work must be one the Sealant Manufacturer's Approved Applicators. ' B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. I . Remove foreign material from Joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combi- i * nation of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimurn bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above, cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chernical cleaners or other ineans that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues could interfere with adhesion of joint sealants. 5. All surfaces to be caulked shall be clean and dry. C. Joint Priming: Prime joint Substrates where recommended in writing byjoint sealant manufacturer, based oil pre - construction j oint- sealant- substrate tests or prior experience. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that other- wise would be permanently stained or dailiaged by such contact or by cleaning inethods required to rernove sealant smears. Reiriove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing Joint seal. E. Sealant Installation: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C I 1 93 for use of joint sealants as applicable to mate- rials, applications, and conditions indicated. F. Install sealant backings to support sealants duning application and at position required to produce optimurn sealant movement capability. 1 . Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Rernove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. G. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. H. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 1. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 2. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths that allow optirnum sealant movement capability. 3. All deep cracks shall be filled to within 1/2 inch of the surface with an appropriate back-up material and caulked with a caulking gun. Caulking beads shall be smooth and straight. 4. Caulk around all door and storefront openings and where noted on the drawings. 1. Masonry control joints shall be caulked with a high -quality paintable urethane caulk. Control depth of caulk at 3/8 . inch to 1/2 inch with a continuous closed -cell rod. J. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool seal- ants to form smooth, uniforrn beads, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of 'oint. j I . Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent sur- faces. 3. Joint Configuration: Concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. K. Clean excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as installation progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of Joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. L. Through -Penetration Firestop Installation: I . General: Installation through -penetration systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" of the firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for the applications indicated. END OF SECTION 07920 SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of access door indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed finish upon request of Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M, 1. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel: Coat to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for steel and iron products and ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware. B. Steel Sheet: 1 . Metallic Coated: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with A60) zinc -iron -alloy (galvan- nealed) coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher- leveled standard of flatness. C. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc -coated steel sheet formed to receive Joint compound and in I size to suit thickness of gypsum panels indicated. D. Plaster Bead: Casing bead formed from 0.0299-inch zinc -coated steel sheet with flange formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster. E. Paint: I . Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chrornate-free, universal modified -alkyd primer com- plying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systerns indicated, and capability to provide sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 2. Shop Primer for Metallic -Coated Steel: Organic zinc -rich primer complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compat- i ible with topcoat. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I . Cesco Products. 2. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 3. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc. 4. Milcor Limited Partnership. 5. Daiken-Hatch B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: I . Material: Prime -painted steel sheet. 2. Surface Type: Masonry, Finish on gypsum substrate, or as indicated on Drawings. 3. Locations: Ceilings or as indicated on Drawings 4. Door: MiDiMUM 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface-MOU11ted trim. 6. Hinges: Spring -loaded concealed pin type. 7. Latch: Screwdriver. PART3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. END OF SECTION 08311 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS � . . . . . I I I I - . I PART I - . 1.1 SUMMARY I A. This Section includes the following: I . Exterior entrance systems. 2. Exterior storefront systems. I 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movements indicated without failure when supporting full dead loads and without framing members transferring stresses to glazing. zn B. Structural -Silicone -Sealant Joints: Less than 20-psi tensile and shear stress in Joints. I C. Structural Loads: I . Wind Load: As indicated oil Drawings or required by authority having jusrisdiction. 2. Seismic Load: As indicated oil Drawings or required by authority having jusrisdiction. D. Structural Performance: Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads indicated. 1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch, whichever is smaller. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: When carrying full dead load, not to exceed amount that reduces glazing Z-1 bite below 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between frarning members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch. E. Structural Testing: ASTM E 330 at t5O percent of inward and outward wind -load design pressures for duration required by design wind velocity without systern evidencing material failures, structural distress, deflection failures, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span. F. Air Infiltration: Limited to 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static- i air -pressure difference of L57 lbf/sq. ft.. G. Water Penetration: No water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind -load design pressure but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. Z:1 H. Temperature Change (Range): Accommodate 120 de- F ambient and 180 deg F material surfaces. 4n 1. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): Not less than 45 per AAMA 1503. 1. .I. Average Thermal CondUctance (U-Value): Not rnore than 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F per AANIA 1503. 1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each system indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation and attachments to other Work. I . Prepare data based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. 2. For entrance systerns, include hardware schedule and locations. C. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color required upon request of Architect. D. Product test reports indicating compliance with applicable wind load provisions required by the authority having juris- diction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace systems that fail in materials and workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes, but is not firnited to the following: I . Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Failure of operating components to function normally. 5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for systems is based oil Kawneer Tri-Fab 450. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: I . EFCO Corporation. 2. Arch Aluminum and Glass Co. 3. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet; ASTM B 221 extrusions. B. Finish: Clear Anodic Finish. Class 1, AAMA 607. 1. C. Glazing: Specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." D. Glazing Gaskets: Pressure -glazing system of black resilient glazing gaskets with sealed corners, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. E. Structural- S ealant-Glazing System: I . Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Permanent, norimigrating types in hardness recom- mended in writing by manufacturer, and compatible with sealant. 2. Structural Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 1184, recommended in writing by sealant and system manufacturers for application indicated, and compatible with system components with which it comes in contact. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. b. Tensile Strength: 100psiminimum. C. Modulus of Elasticity: Allows maximum movement of 25 percent of Joint width, unless less movement is required by system design, 3. Secondary Sealant (Weatherseal): ASTM C 920, compatible with structural silicone sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact, and accommodates 50 percent increase or decrease in joint width at the time of application when tested according to ASTM C 719. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. F. Gaskets, Sealants, and Joint Fillers: 1. For joints within framing system, as recommended in writing by manufacturer for joint type indicated. 2. For joints at perirneter of systerns as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos, cold -applied asphalt ma,."L-ic paint formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Doors: 1-3/4-inch-thick glazed doors with minirnum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members, mechanically fastened corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie -rods, and with snap -on extruded -aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets. I . Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. a. Stile Design: Medium, 3-1/2-inch maximum width. 2. Hardware: As specified in Division 8 door hardware Section. B. Fasteners, Flashings, and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, and non - bleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subfrarnes and reinforci ing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. B. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Doors and Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads and for hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for fac- tory -installed hardware before finishing components. D. Factory assemble framing and components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. PART3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Isolate metal surfaces in con . tact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer. B. Install components to drain water passing Joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing." I . Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured. ' i 2. Install secondary sealant (weatherseal) to produce weatherproof joints. 3. Remove excess sealant before sealant has cured. D. Install sealants at system perimeter to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances: I . Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1/16 inch For surfaces meeting at corners, limit offset to 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. - F. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth opera- tion. END OF SECTION 08410 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART I - 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications: I . Doors. 2. Glazed entrances. � 3. Storefront framing. . B, See Division 8 "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts". 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Work under this specification inc,ludes the furnishing of all labor, material and services necessary and reasonably inci- dental to the providing and installing of all glazing in sash and doors shown on the drawings. B. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manu- . facture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. C. Glass Design: Glass thickness indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thickness by analyz- ing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thickness indi I- cated, but not less than thickness and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to rneet or exceed the following .. . criteria: 1. Glass, Thickiiess: Select minimum glass thickness to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following - requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. b. Specified Design Snow Loads: As indicated. C. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. I ) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. d. ii ickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 1/4 inch tempered. e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat -Absorbing Glass: "Insulated", 1/4 inch tempered inside and outside with 1/2 inch airspace. D. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting frorn a maximum change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C), in ambient and surface temperatures, respectively, acting oil glass framing niernbers and glaz- ing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and i nighttime -sky heat loss. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on filanufac- turer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: I . For rrionollthic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch thick. 2. Center -of -Glass U-Values: National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq, in x K). Z). 3. Center -of -Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 corn- puter prograrn. 4. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B . Samples: 12-inch- (300--rilm-) square, for tinted glass product indicated upon request of architect. C, Glazing Schedule: Use sairie designations indicated oil Drawings. D. Sealant cornpatibility and adhesion test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASS URANCE A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant rnanufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether Zn priming and other specificjoint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optirnurn adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other articles including schedules where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: I . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. I a. ASA Industries, Inc. b. Libby -Owens Ford -Glass Company C. Mississippi Glass Company d. Pittsburg Plate Glass Company 2. Trade names herein denote grade, type and quality of material required. 2.2 GLASS MATERIALS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated �n in schedules at the end of Part 3. B. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3 I . Fabrication Process: At manufacturer's option. 2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: I . Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals Of 111sulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under condi- tions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experi- ence. 2. Colors of Exposed Sealants: As indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid - applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class and uses. I . Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Glazing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in thejoint width existing at time of . i i i installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASNIT C 920 for uses indicated. C. Cylindrical Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.4 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastorneric tape with a solids content of 100 percent with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: I . AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. ded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed -cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; pack- aged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of type and material indicated below and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene or EPDM dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 846. 2. Silicone dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 11 15. 3. Neoprene, EPDM or Silicone soft compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type 11, black. 2. 6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A, General: Provide products of material, size. and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or millus 5. D. Spacers: Elastorneric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufac- turer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). E Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and density to control glaz- ing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant perforrilance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire -Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire -resistance rating. 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. Clean glazing channlels and other1framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coat- ings not firmly bonded to substrates. 2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove glass with edge damage or other . mperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance from Project I site and legally dispose of off Project site. J 3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testing. 4. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 5. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances. B. Protection: I . Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. 2. Protect glass from contact with contarninating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged, including natural causes, accidents, . and vandalism, during construction period. D. At completion this contractor shall wash and polish all glazing and clean adjacent surfaces soiled by his work. END OF SECTION 08800 SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART I - 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Portland Cement Plaster Finishes: Stucco. 2. Non -load -bearing steel framing and furring. 3. Metal lath and metal accessories. B. See Division 5 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for load -bearing steel framing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each texture required upon request of the Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . . . I A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide assemblies identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM h 11 9 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS; A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after plaster application. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 1 NON -LOAD -BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Sheet Components, General: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements. L Protective Coating: a. Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. b. Exterior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. pended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: Size metal ceiling supports to comply with ASTM C 1063, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: Anchors fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 tirnes that imposed by . construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. C� a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 64 I/A 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper. 3. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, corn mercial- steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a mini- inurn 1/2-inch-wide flange, and in depth indicated. 4. Furring Channels (Furring Members): a. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with rnin'murn 1/" deep. I I I I .--inch-wide flange, 3/4 inch C. Partition Lind Soffit Framing: I . Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated, ?. - Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimurn 1/2-inch wide flange, and in depth indicated. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Charmels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. L_ I? I') LATH - A. Expanded- Metal Lath: ASTM C 847. , I � Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet, structural quality, with coating complying with ASTM A 653/ In A 653 M, G60 (Z 1 80) coating designation. 1). Diarriond-Mesh Lath: Self -furring. a. Weight: 21.5 lb/sq. yd.. B. Paper Backing: Factory bonded to back of lath, complying with FS LJU-B-790, Type 1. I . Vapor -Permeable Paper: Grade D, Style 2. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: ASTM C 1063. Coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large -mesh, diamond -metal lath fabricated from zinc -alloy or welded -wire rnesh fabricated from 0.0475-inch diameter, zinc -coated (galvanized) wire and specially fornied to reinforce external corners of portland cement plaster oil exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. I . Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick. 2. Aluminum: Minimum 0.050 inch thick. C. Comerbeads: Small nose comerbeads with expanded flanges of large -mesh diamond -metal lath allowing full plaster encasement. 1 . Material: Zinc alloy or aluminum. D. Casing Beads: Square -edged style, with expanded flanges. I . Material: Zinc alloy or aluminum. E. Curved Casing Beads: Square -edged style, fabricated from aluminum coated with clear plastic, preformed into curve of radius indicated. F. Control Joints: Prefabricated with removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints. I . Material: Zinc alloy or aluminum. 2. Type: 2-piece, casing beads with back flanges formed to produce slip -joint action, adjustable for 'oint widths j frorn 1/8 to 518 inch. G. Corner Reinforcement: Special Stucco type woven wire corner reinforcing strips. H. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base -Coat Cements: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1. B. Job -Mixed Finish -Coat Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1. C. Stucco Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard factory -packaged stucco, including portland cement, aggregate, and other proprietary ingredients. I . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Florida Stucco Corp. b. Highland Stucco. C. IPA Systems, Inc. I d. United States Gypsum Co. D. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S; or special hydrated lime for masonry pur- poses, ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897. F. Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897 system, manufactured or natural sand, white. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable. B. Bondin-Agent.: ASTMC932. Zn C. Acid -Etching Solution: Muriatic acid (10 percent solution of commercial hydrochloric acid) mixed I part to not less than 6 nor more than I 0 parts water. D. Dash -Coat Material: 2 parts portland cement to 3 parts fine sand, mixed with water to a mushy -paste consistency. E. Steel Drill Screws: Q� -d U � f 2 _ . ! IF T 8 f-I . � M. . E .9 . $:� C�A, .-,, 00 C121 CD CD 1� Q V) � ;_4 ,--I � P.� 0 U il ..4"i U rp = U s., t C) U a) .2 P_� W rl 0 . � a bb 0 = (J 0� cc 7J a VE04 4� '9 5� U Cn 4-j Lt 0 U 4_4 74 .,-q ;:3 ,r,, U ;..q U -< I (3 = 6 = 0 0- =3 0 %_ 0 CZ �-_ co 0 LU co Z co -= < < i C) < Er (1) 00 < _J LLJ 0 U_ M E < - < -- � g Z " M =_ I— (.0 ;!s Z 0- R" LU _J 0 Itt - = " 8rn -,, c� 6�0 -6 lt� 5 I8 -�. "T 0 g - 04, ;:I 0 . U �CD I �-, E '6 a� 8 O_ R�� - 0,.q Q. L �, [-- 0 P�,= W_� "I- �i " ,,� 0� PL4 � CJ) = 0 -1-0 ca 0 �L__ 0 (1) 0- U) >-. 0_ 0 C CZ U X UJ _J -0 tZ =3 F__ �- a- LU LL1 M W - . � 1--l' 1, , � " , I I 1 W 11 11 11 Z 11 4V �> � LU CO ", , _1 �2 I CO M *Aft. 4-� .,:� 44- ;_1 < r UJ Cr , I J> __J _U U_ �_ ZP-- U) � ? . ' 1, I ' I I .I,.-,,- �__ I _�11 �, 1, ,� I " I I , , , "' , I 11 I 11 I I "" Z = LU LD C) cn Cn Ff) 0 U) Cn Er � � 0 � z � : a- 0- a_ 0- CO CO �20 ;� �, C\1 C\J ;:: -I ,:�i r1_1 r,_1 r-- co W C\1 C\1 " C\J _J Lu 11�1 X I I I I - __. 1 � � I �-I" 1 " � 11 .1 �; b I "I , I " , I I 11 Z �- �, r__ C? -�, 0 1 0 co LU (O 3 C) C\1 C) . " W 8 M Cr �!: I CD W �e :E 0 M 0 0� !1� - UJ � I CL 0 I �� I 0 1. PUBLIX CANOPY PACKAGE PCA004 - -- - - - - . - - - - - -- i 1. ASTM C 1002 for fastening metal lath to wood or steel members less than 0.033 inch thick. 2. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening metal lath to steel members 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. - 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work = include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ChemRex, Inc., Contech Brands; PL Acoustical Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. - C. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. F. Three -Coat Work over Metal Lath: 1. Scratch and Brown Coat Mixes: Scratch, 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate; brown, 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts aggregate. - G. Two -Coat Work over Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Base Coat Mix: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 4 parts aggregate. H. Job -Mixed Finish Coats: 1. Mixes with Sand Aggregates: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LATH AND FURRING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Standards: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and ASTM C 1063. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, handrails, furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable written instructions of lath and furring manufacturer. C. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abut building structure horizontally and where partition or wall abuts overhead structure, isolate from structural movement to prevent transfer of loading from building structure. 1. Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accesso- j ries. D. Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings and frames for other work as - indicated. Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work that is not indicated to be supported indepen- 11 dently of metal furring and lathing system. 3.2 NON -LOAD -BEARING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Suspension Systems: 1. Preparation and Coordination: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of over- head structural systems to ensure inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacings required to support ceiling. 2. Hanger Installation: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with referenced standards. a. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs. 3. Install ceiling suspension system components of sizes and spacings indicated, but not in smaller sizes or greater spacings than those required by referenced lathing and furring installation standards. B. Partition Framing and Furring: Comply with ASTM C 754 and ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring." 1. Steel Stud Systems to Receive Metal Lath: a. Extend and attach partition support systems to structure above suspended ceilings, unless otherwise indi- cated. b. Extend partition support systems to finish ceilings and attach to ceiling suspension members, unless oth- erwise indicated. 3.3 LATHING A. Install where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced ML/SFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation stan- dards. I . Suspended and Furred Ceilings: Use flat, diamond -mesh lath. _ 2 Vertical Metal Framing and Furring: Use flat, diamond -mesh lath and cold -rolled channel stud framing. 3. Exterior Sh , ihed Wall Surfaces: Use paper -faced, self -furring, diamond -mesh lath 4. M:;tnolithie Surfaces: Use [self -furring, diamond -mesh lath or vertical metal framing and furring as required for plaster thickness. 1 3.4 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING A. Protect contiguous Work from damage and deterioration caused by plastering with temporary covering and other pro- visions necessary. B. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work. C. Etch concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. Scrub with acid -etching solution on previously wetted surface and rinse thoroughly with clean water. Repeat apincation, if necessary, to �'i obtain adequate suction and mechanical bond of plaster (where dash coat, bonding agent, or additive is not used). D. Apply bonding agent on concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. E. Apply dash coat on concrete surfaces indicated for direct luster application. Moist -cure f a s 2 pp y p dash coat or at least �4 hours - I after application and before plastering. F. Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with scratch - coat work. _- G. Refer to Division 6 Sections for installing permanent wood grounds. H. Refer to Division 7 Sections for installing flashing. x 1. Surface Conditioning: Immediately lastering,dam en concrete and concrete unit masonry except where a bonding agent has been applied, to produce optimum suction for plastering. :i 3.5 PLASTERING ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster acces- sories. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and in alignment during plastering. 1. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement. • external �r atcorners. 2. Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following cri- �;a teria and approved by Architect:: ,` a. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind plaster mem- brane. b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet in either direction or a length -to -width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1. 7. c. Wall Areas: Not more than 144 sq. ft. d. Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq., ft. in area. - e. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. B. Where sound -rated plaster work is indicated by STC ratings or other notation, seal work at perimeters, control joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Comply with ASTM C 919 and plaster - manufacturer's written instructions for location of sealant beads. f, C. Install sound attenuation blankets within stud cavities where indicated. 3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION A. Plaster Application Standard: Comply with ASTM C 926. _ 1. Mixing: Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable refer- enced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. 2. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials. 3. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials. B. Flat Surface T ler•n r o aces• .. D o lot deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed at any location on surface. C. Grout hollow -metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base -coat plaster material, and before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire -resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor. D. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by instal- • lction of other. E. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless other- "� wise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. - F. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with eornerbeads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work. G. Number of Coats: 1. Metal Lath: Three coats. 2. Concrete Unit Masonry: Two coats. 3. Concrete, Cast -in -Place or Precast: Two coats when surface condition complies with ASTM C 926 for plaster bonded to solid base. H. Finish Coats: 1. Float Finish: Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch to completely cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with fine -textured finish matching sample. 2. Trowel -Textured Finish: Apply finish coat with hand -troweled -textured finish matching sample. 3. Moist -cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including written instructions for time between coats and curing in "Alex A2 Design Considerations." 3.7 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND CLEANING - A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point -up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects. B. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. END OF SECTION 09220 SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior gypsum board panels for ceilings and soffit s. 2. Non -load -bearing steel framing. 12 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work upon request of Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construc- tion identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Framing, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements. a. Protective Coating: 2) Exterior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: I. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0. 0475-inch- diameter wire. 2. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: a. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant mate- rials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, with- out failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.. 4. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a mini- mum 1/2-inch-wide flange, and in depth indicated. 5. Furring Channels (Furring Members): a. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. b. "Z" Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 1 1/2 inch deep. C. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 2. Deep -Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges. 3. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch or as indicated. 4. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flange, and in depth indicated. a. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. 5. , Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. b. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire. 6. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and cor- respond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard.: ASTM C 36. 1. Regular Type: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. 2. Type X: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM. C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular -type panels of the same thickness, 1 /4 inch thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. D. Sag -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board, 1/2 inch (12.7 inm) thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply on ceiling surfaces. E. Exterior Gypsum Panels for Ceilings and Soffits: I . Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with core type and in thickness indicated. a. Product: G-P Gypsum Corp; Dens -Glass Gold. 2A TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047, hot -dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. I . Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot open- ing. B. Alu7ninum'I'rim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Products: a. Fry Reglet Corp.; As indicated by designation on Drawings. b. Gordon, Inc.. C. MM Systems Corporation; As indicated by designation on Drawings. d. Pittcon Industries; As indicated by designation on Drawings. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion -resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: I . Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass -Mat Gypsurn Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other com- pounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim accessories, and fasten- ers, use setting -type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat use setting -type, g ype, topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type, sandable topping com- pounds. 2. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NON -LOAD -BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 1. Suspend ceiling hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspen- sion members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Attach hangers to structural members. Do not support ceilings from or attach hangers to permanent metal forms, steel deck tabs, steel roof decks, ducts, pipes, or conduit. 4. Screw furring to wood framing. 5. Wire -tie furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated. 6. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. C. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and wall. 2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and open- ings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 3. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written rec- ommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 4. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.2 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 2. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 3. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 4. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 5. Laminating to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporar- ily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. B. Exterior Ceilings and Soffits: Apply exterior gypsum panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Fasten with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.3 FINISHING A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Finishing Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 1. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. 3. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. 4. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indi- cated: 1. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 09260 SECTION 09900 - PAINT AND WALL FINISHES PART I- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed items and surfaces. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of finish -coat material indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. 1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.. 2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign mate;=--ia'k and residue. B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. C. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F. D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra mate- rials to Owner. I. Quantity: 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or I case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. C. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part. 2 articles: I. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint -material containers not dis- playing manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. C. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.3 PREPARATORY COATS A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat manufacturer and recom- mended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. B. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex -based primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 1. Ferrous -Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust -inhibitive metal primer. 2 Zi nc -Coated Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, use paint speci- fied for finish coat. C. Interior Primer: Interior latex -based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 1. Ferrous -Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust -inhibitive metal primer. 2. Zinc -Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, use paint speci- fied for finish coat. 2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Low -Luster - Satin Finish Acrylic Paint: 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec 100% Acrylic Exterior Satin No. 184. 2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402 series Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Satin Finish. 3. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Satin House & Trim Paint A82 Series. B. Exterior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28. 2. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish. 3. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W 100 Series. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for inspection and acceptance of surfaces to be painted. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, pro- vide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. l . After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. C. If transparent finish is required, baekprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immedi- ately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ngalv nrized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC s recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with sol- vents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. E. Material Preparation: 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and resi- due. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 2. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 3. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufac- turer's written instructions. J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire systern as recommended by manufacturer. K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. L. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. M. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. N. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uni- form finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. O. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfec- tions. P. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by clean- ing, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After complet-nr painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P 1. 3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): I . Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. B. Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. C. Mineral -Fiber -Reinforced Cement Panels: 1. Acrylic Finish:Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. D. Ferrous Metal: 1. Acrylic Finish Two finish coatsover a rust -inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous -metal primer (not required on shop -primed items). b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. E. Zinc -Coated Metal: I . Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: See. section 2.4. J. Aluminum: I . Acrylic-Enarnel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. END OF SECTION 09900 SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed, extruded -aluminum louvers. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and wind loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward, without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. B. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from a temperature change (range) of 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces, by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of com- ponents, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. C. Air -Performance, Water -Penetration, and Wind -Driven Rain Ratings: As demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units according to AMCA 500-L. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Draw- ings. C. Samples: For each type of finish upon request of Architect. D. Product test reports verifying compliance with applicable wind loads by testing methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Louvers: a. Airline Products Co. b. Cesco Products. C. Greenheck. d. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005. C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate frames to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. B. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view. C. Join frame members be s to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fast eners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view. 2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED -ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal, Nondrainable-B lade Louver: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Greenheck ESU or a comparable product of one of the following: a. Airline Products Co. b. Cesco Products. C. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Blade Profile: Plain blade without center baffle. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Performance Requirements: a. Free Area: Not less than 7.5 sq. ft. for 48-inch- wide by 48-inch- high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 700 fpm. C. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at free -area velocity. 2.5 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at interior face of each exterior louver. B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. C. Louver Screening: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire. 2.6 FINISHES A. Aluminum, High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. END OF SECTION 10200 IL i E T a E 9 G � N \ 1��11 ;.� � 0 0 $-�,0 � U� IU ,It � = M Uo w i$-+ 0 U - o wo b� o r to o 50 O gU V. .T..Iw o Qo U�w 6a8 ¢^ Lt U o� a � r o � 3 �"� ram-, W) .� �"' a, U U.<,, U Cv i O i CZ `° M U w Z <" � a -= Q ^, a W U F Qo w E a MEQ Z 'i M /^� Z 1..1 _ c� ,< w 0 U) = 2 -#--+ 0 CU W 0. Cif X uJ :5 ~ =:3 r= C. LU w w = U) \\ '. '.......y. •, I. ) 1�1_� >� LIJ C0 00r t -1 m . a, ; •Q � z r Z< w °C it wUL 11 15 Z Z F- 0 0 w U) � o m cc m Ov w x x x F- m m m :E > > > w Cl_ a a a Cl) 00 CO V CD N O N N r- r p ^I �I 0I w o o 0 0 a w J w 11 Z r- �- 6' O o 0 co 0 LU N O o w C,�' 0 w m Q� r = t- I 0 0 U PUBLIX CANOPY PACKAGE PCA005 � DESK-zN GfRITEfRIA D1 ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO AT LEAST THE MINIMUM STANDARDS OF THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, 2004 EDITION, WITH 2O06 REVISIONS. D2 FOR DESIGN LOAD VALUES, SEE SPECIFIC PLANS. FOUNDATION SHEET PG6101 ROOF FRAMING SHEETS PC5101 TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEER'S KNOWLEDGE, THE STRUCTURAL PLANS D3 AND SPECIFICATIONS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BUILDING CODE. EVERY REASONABLE EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE D4 COORDINATION BETWEEN THESE DWGS AND THE BOUND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS. SHOULD THERE BE ANY DISCREPANCIES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUEST A CLARIFICATION IN WRITING. GENERAL G1 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW AND DETERMINE THAT DIMENSIONS ARE COORDINATED BETWEEN ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR START OF CONSTRUCTION. G2 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MEASURES NECESSARY TO PROTECT THE STRUCTURE, THE WORK PERSONS AND OTHER PEOPLE DURING CONSTRUCTION. HE SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONSTRUCTION. G3 NO STRUCTURAL MEMBER SHALL BE CUT, NOTCHED OR OTHERWISE REDUCED IN STRENGTH. G4 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ANCHORED, EMBEDDED AND SUPPORTED ITEMS WHICH AFFECT THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES, G5 ALL SUBMITTAL SETS SHALL CONSIST OF A MAXIMUM OF (5) COPIES. ANY ADDITIONAL COPIES WILL BE DISCARDED. G6 ANY SUBMITTALS RECEIVED BY ARCH/ENG THAT HAVE NOT BEEN CHECKED BY THE GC AND HIS SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL BE RETURNED WITHOUT REVIEW. G� ALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO BE TYPICAL OR SIMILAR UNLESS ANOTHER SECTION OR DETAIL IS NOTED, GO ANY CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE SPECIFICATIONS AND DESIGN DRAWINGS SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT. THE MORE STRINGENT REQUIREMENTS SHALL GOVERN UNLESS DETERMINED OTHERWISE BY THE ARCHITECT. G9 BBM STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS ASSUMES NO RISK OR LIABILITY FOR THE SITE SAFETY OR WELL-BEING OF ANY CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR NOR THEIR EMPLOYEES DURING THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE PROJECT CONTAINED IN THESE DOCUMENTS. 1=OUND,4T I ONS F1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY -STANDARD SOIL DENSITY TESTS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH GEOTECHNICAL SOILS REPORT. SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. F2 CONTRACTOR, IN CONJUNCTION WITH GEOTECHNICAL FIELD REPRESENTATIVE, SHALL DETERMINE IF ANY UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS ARE DISCOVERED DURING EXCAVATION WHICH WOULD PREVENT ATTAINMENT OF THE DESIGN SOIL PRESSURE RECOMMENDED BY THE SOILS REPORT. F3 FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN VALUES, SEE FOUNDATION SCHEDULE. 6L,45 ON GRADE 6OG1 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN THE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT, COMPACT INTERIOR FILL TO'B5% OF MODIFIED PROCTOR MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY (ASTM D1557). SOIL COMPACTION SHALL BE FIELD -CONTROLLED BY A REPRESENTATIVE TECHNICIAN OF A QUALIFIED LABORATORY, EACH LAYER OF FILL SHALL NOT EXCEED 12" THICK AND SHALL BE COMPACTED PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF NEXT LAYER. 5OG2 MAXIMUM SPACING OF CONTROL JOINTS (Le. SAWCUT JOINT OR CONSTRUCTION JOINT) SHALL BE AS SET IN THE TABLE BELOW, OR AS NOTED ON PLANS. THE MORE STRINGENT SHALL APPLY. PATTERNS SHALL BE APPROXIMATELY SQUARE WITH A RATIO OF LONG SIDE TO SHORT SIDE NOT EXCEEDING 1.5 TO 1. SLAB THICKNESS (IN) * 3/4" OR LARGER AGGREGATE SPACING (FT) 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 16 8 18 9 19 10 20 * MIX DESIGNS CONTAINING AGGREGATE LESS THAN 3/4" ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. * * SAWCUT SLAB AS SOON AS AGGREGATE DOES NOT DISLODGE (MUST BE WITHIN 12 HOURS OF CONCRETE PLACEMENT). SOG3 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF SJ'S AND CJ'S WITH ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR FINISHES TO ENSURE SLAB JOINTS DO NOT READ THROUGH. 5OC34 SLAB THICKNESS SHALL BE INGREASED AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE SUPPORT FOR CRANE LOADS WITHOUT CRACKING SLAB. 1VIECH,4NICAL 1=,4STENER6 MF1 EXPANSION ANCHORS SHALL BE I'POWER-STUD" BY RAWL OR "TRUBOLT" BY ITW RAMSET/REDHEAD OR ENGINEER -APPROVED EQUAL. MF2 ADHESIVE ANCHORS SHALL BE ''POWER -FAST" BY RAWL OR "EPCON" BY ITW RAMSET/REDHEAD OR ENGINEER -APPROVED EQUAL. MF3 MASONRY SCREWS SHALL BE "TAPPERS" BY RAWL OR "TAPCON" BY ITW RAMSET/REDHEAD OR ENGINEER -APPROVED EQUAL. MF4 POWDER -ACTUATED FASTENERS (PAF) SHALL BE BY ITW RAMSET/REDHEAD, HILTI OR ENGINEER -APPROVED EQUAL. MF5 REFER TO LIGHT -GAGE FRAMING NOTES (IF APPLICABLE) FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. MF6 CARBON -STEEL EXPANSION ANCHORS SHALL HAVE A ONE-PIECE ANCHOR BODY WITH A LENGTH IDENTIFICATION CODE. THE ANCHORS SHALL HAVE AN EXPANSION MECHANISM WHICH CONSISTS OF A PAIR OF INTERLOCKING INDEPENDENT WEDGES. CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS SHALL BE PLATED ACCORDING TO ASTM SPECIFICATION B 6.33. EXPANSION ANCHORS MUST MEET THE DESCRIPTION IN FEDERAL SPECIFICATION FF-8-325 FOR CONCRETE EXPANSION ANCHORS, MF7 ALL FASTENERS SHALL BE INSTALLED PER THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. REFER TO LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING NOTES (IF APPLICABLE) FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. L (GHTGAGE 1`l1=TAL 1=RA1- I ING LMF1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD INSPECTIONS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS (IF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER_ LMF2 CONNECT STEEL STUDS AND TRACKS TO 436 STEEL OR CONCRETE WITH (2) FASTENERS (PAF) AT EACH STUD, AND CONNECT STEEL STUDS AND TRACKS TO EACH OTHER WITH (2) *8-18 SCREWS AT EACH STUD (TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND EXTENTS OF STEEL STUD WORK. NOTE: "POWDER ACTUATED FASTENER (PAF)" REFERS TO 0.1454, SHANK DOMED -HEAD, LOW -VELOCITY POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS AS MANUFACTURED BY POWERS RAWL OR APPROVED EQUAL WITH MINIMUM CAPACITIES AS FOLLOWS: IN 3000 PS 1 CONCRETE: 1 1/2'' PENETRATION = 185* PULLOUT 4 225* SHEAR IN 436 STEEL: 1/4" MATERIAL = 430* PULLOUT 4 660* SHEAR (PIN MUST FULLY PENETRATE THE MATERIAL BY 1/4" MINIMUM) �UI�T�IUJR�AIL��►1�R'�A1�►CO�T�ES� L IG4TG;AGE 1 IETAL FfRA„f INCH LMFS STEEL STUDS SHALL MEET FOLLOWING DESIGN CRITERIA: GALV G-60 45TM A525, MINIMUM YIELD STRESS SHALL BE 50,000 PSI FOR 12ga, 14ga, 16ga AND 33000 PSI FOR 18ga 4 20ga. STUD SIZE EFFECTIVE MINIMUM I EFFECTIVE MINIMUM S 3 5/8"x16 GA .854g .4388 3 5/8"x18 GA .6941 .3652 3 5/5"x20 GA .5354 .2608 4"x16 GA 1.0152 .502-t 4"x18 GA 3-122 4"x20 GA 6i22 .2589 6 "x16 GA 2.SO33 .8812 6"x18 GA 2.2ro-15 .7328 6 "x20 GA 1.1421 .5234 8"x14 GA 6.94-17 1.100-1 S"x16 GA 5.6294 1.34-10 8"x18 GA 4.5454 1.10-18 0"40 GA 3.4876 .6684 NOTES: 1. NOT ALL SIZES MAY BE USED. SEE PLANS AND SECTIONS FOR SIZES) REQUIRED. (51ZE6 AND GAGES ON STRUCTURAL DWGS SHALL GOVERN OVER ARCHITECTURAL DWGS) 2. ALL SIZES SHALL HAVE 1-5/8" FLANGES, LMF4 BRACING DURING CONSTRUCTION: PROVIDE 1 1/2" GOLD -ROLLED CHANNELS OR HORIZONTAL STRAP BRACING FOR WALLS IMMEDIATELY AFTER STUDS ARE ERECTED. LMFS EXECUTION: POSITION STUDS VERTICALLY IN RUNNERS AND SPACE NO GREATER THAN 16". SECURELY ANCHOR EACH STUD TO RUNNER WITH (4) *8-18 LOW -PROFILE SCREWS, TWO AT TOP AND TWO AT BOTTOM, WITH ONE SCREW IN EACH FLANGE. TRACKS SHALL BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS. AT TRACK BUTT JOINTS, ABUTTING PIECES OF TRACK SHALL BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO A COMMON STRUCTURAL ELEMENT, OR THEY SHALL BE BUTT -WELDED OR SPLICED TOGETHER. JACK STUDS OR CRIPPLES SHALL BE INSTALLED BELOW WINDOW SILLS, ABOVE WINDOW AND DOOR HEADS, AT FREE STANDING STAIR RAILS, AND ELSEWHERE TO FURNISH SUPPORT, AND SHALL BE SECURELY ATTACHED TO SUPPORTING MEMBERS. PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURE VERTICAL MOVEMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED WHERE INDICATED ON THE PLANS. SPLICES IN AXIALLY LOADED STUDS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. LMF6 EXTERIOR SHEATHING: ATTACH GYPSUM SHEATHING TO EXTERIOR OF EACH STUD WITH I" TYPE(S) 5-12 COATED SCREWS SPACED 3/5" FROM ENDS AND EDGES AND AT APPROXIMATELY 8" OC. LMF-1 LATERAL BRACING (HORIZONTAL BRIDGING) FOR WALLS: (NOTE: IF NON -LOAD -BEARING WALLS (PARTITION WALLS OR CURTAIN WALLS) HAVE SHEATHING ON BOTH SIDES, LATERAL BRACING IS NOT REQUIRED.) ENSURE BOTH STUD FLANGES ARE ATTACHED TO TOP AND BOTTOM RUNNER FLANGES. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING MUST BE INSTALLED AT SPACING NOT TO EXCEED 48" OC FOR AXIAL LOAD BEARING WALLS AND 60" OC MEASURED VERTICALLY FOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALLS CARRYING WIND LOAD ONLY. (TYPICAL FOR ALL OPTIONS BELOW.) 16ga V-BAR BRIDGING ATTACHED TO BOTH FLANGES, SEE NOTES FOR SPACING. (1) *10 (TYP) Qr �' MTL STUD - SEE PLAN HORIZONTAL BRIDGING - OPTION #1 5/8" TYPE 5-12 LOW PROFILE HEAD SCREWS ID BRIDGING RUNNER) 1 1/2"-20 GAGE STRAP BRIDGING STL STUD HORIZONTAL BRIDGING CONSISTS OF GUT -TO -LENGTH RUNNER FOR SOLID BRIDGING AND STEEL STRAPS ON BOTH SIDES OF STUD, SOLID BRIDGING IS PLACED AT EA END OF WALL, ADJACENT TO WALL OPENINGS AND 8'-O" OC MAX, MEASURED VERTICALLY. RUNNER HAS WEB FLANGE BENT AT EACH END AND IS SECURED TO EACH STUD FLANGE WITH ONE 5/8" TYPE 5-12 LOW PROFILE SCREW. STRAP BRIDGING OF 1 1/2" WIDE BY 20ga STEEL IS FASTENED TO EACH STUD FLANGE WITH ONE 5/8" TYPE 5-12 SCREW AND TO EACH RUNNER FLANGE WITH FOUR SCREWS. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING - OPTION #2 1 1/2" COLD ROLLED CHANNELS MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF ABOVE DETAIL TO BRACE STUDS LATERALLY. CHANNELS ARE INSERTED THROUGH STUD WEB HOLES AND SECURED WITH SCREW -ATTACHED 1 1/2 "4 "x16ga CL IF ANGLES CUT TO LENGTH 1/4" LESS THAN STUD WIDTH. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING - OPTION #3 LMFS METAL STUD INSTALLATION: METAL STUDS SHALL EXTEND INTO ALL TRACKS UNTIL IT IS WITHIN 1/2" OF THE TRACK WEB. NO METAL STUD TRACK SHALL EXTEND PAST THE EDGE OF THE SUPPORT MORE THAN ONE THIRD OF ITS WIDTH ( e.g. A 6" TRACK MAY EXTEND BEYOND THE EDGE OF SUPPORT A MAX OF (o/3=2"). STEEL ROOF DECK RD1 SEE ROOF FRAMING PLAN(S) FOR STEEL DECK ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE. RD2 STEEL ROOF DECK UNITS SHALL BE FABRICATED FROM STEEL CONFORMING TO SECTION A3 OF THE LATEST EDITION OF THE AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE, SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN OF COLD - FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. THE STEEL USED SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH OF 33 KSI (230 MPa). RD3 ALL FIELD WELDING OF DECK SHALL BE IN STRICT CONFORMANCE WITH ANSI/AWSDI3 STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE. RD4 GALVANIZING SHALL CONFORM TO A6TM-A653, STRUCTURAL QUALITY AND FEDERAL SPEC, QQ-5-715. RD5 SEE CHART BELOW FOR MINIMUM SECTION PROPERTIES REQUIRED FOR STEEL DECK. PROPERTIES SHOWN ARE REPRODUCED FROM THE VULCRAFT MANUAL. ROOF DECK DECK TYPE DESIGN THICK I ins/ft Sp in3/ft Sn in3/ft 522 0.0295 0.169 0.186 0.192 B20 0.0358 0.212 0.234 0.24i B18 I 0.0474 0.292 0.318 0.32-1 fi R1=-1=,45R1 CATER L IG�4T STEEL TRUSSI=S 57 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD INSPECTIONS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS CIF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. ST2 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PLANS, DETAILS AND CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION. CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY AN ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE SAME STATE AS PROJECT LOCATION. "BBM STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS" WILL REQUIRE THAT THE ENGINEERED DRAWINGS FOR THE STEEL TRUSSES BE REVIEWED FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THE DESIGN INTENT OF THE STRUCTURE PRIOR TO FABRICATION. ANY AND ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH FABRICATING TRUSSES FROM SUBMITTALS NOT BEARING OUR SHOP DRAWING STAMP AND APPROVAL WILL BE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR, 5T3 SEE ROOF FRAMING PLANS AND ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT AND SLOPES OF STEEL TRUSSES. 5T4 ALL TRUSSES SHALL BE DESIGNED BY A SPECIALTY ENGINEER WITH A MINIMUM OF (5) YEARS EXPERIENCE IN SIMILAR TYPE STRUCTURES. ST5 ALL TRUSSES SHALL BE TEMPORARILY AND PERMANENTLY BRACED AS REQUIRED BY TRUSS MFR. BRACING AND BRIDGING BY TRUSS MFR. 5T6 MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR TOP CHORD OF ALL TRUSSES SHALL BE 18 GA. ST7 THE ROOF FRAMING PLAN SHOWN HEREIN 16 A GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION ONLY. REFER TO TRUSS SUBMITTALS FOR ACTUAL LAYOUT, TRUSS PROFILES AND CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS AT ALL TRUSS SUPPORTS, STS ALL TRUSS -TO -TRUSS 4 TRUSS TO STRUCTURE CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED AND DETAILED BY TRUSS MANUFACTURER. CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR DEAD, LIVE AND WIND (BOTH UPLIFT 4 LATERAL) LOADS, ST9 TRUSSES SHALL BE SHOP FABRICATED, INCLUDING ANY FIELD SPLICE CONNECTION COMPONENTS AND SHIPPED TO SITE IN MAXIMUM LENGTHS AND HEIGHTS. FIELD FABRICATION OF TRUSSES WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. STIO ALL TRUSS MEMBERS SHALL BE GALVANIZED METAL STUD STOCK AND GALVANIZED SHEET OF SIZES AND GAGES TO BE DETERMINED BY THE MANUFACTURER'S STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS. GALVANIZED CUSTOM SHAPE AND CONNECTOR SYSTEMS SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR USE IN TRUSSES WILL BE ACCEPTABLE. STII REVIEW ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLANS FOR OPERABLE WALLS THAT ARE SUSPENDED FROM THE TRUSSES, ANALYSIS FOR CLOSED, PARTIALLY OPEN AND OPEN POSITION LOAD CURVES IS REQUIRED, REFER TO WALL MANUFACTURER FOR SPECIAL DEFLECTION CRITERIA. 6T12 REVIEW ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND SECTIONS FOR SPECIAL CEILING CONDITIONS, INCLUDING CEILING SLOPES, TROFFERS, COFFERS, TRAYS, STEPS AND OTHER SPECIAL FEATURES. 573 THE SUPPORTS FOR SCISSOR, ARCHED CHORDS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR TYPE TRUSS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, SHALL BE DESIGNED WITH A PINNED CONNECTION AT ONE END AND A HORIZONTAL ROLLER AT THE OTHER END. THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, HAS NOT BEEN DESIGNED FOR ANY GRAVITY LOAD HORIZONTAL FORCE DUE TO DEFLECTION. DO NOT DESIGN THESE TYPE OF TRUSSES WITH PINNED SUPPORTS EACH END. CONCRETE AND RE INI=ORC ING C1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD TESTING INCLUDING SLUMP TESTS AND CYLINDER BREAKS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS CIF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. C2 CONCRETE WORK SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 318-02 BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. C3 ALL CONCRETE SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING PROPERTIES: C4 C5 C6 C-1 LOCATION DAY SLUMP COARSE STRENGTH STRENGTH AGGREGATES) FOUNDATIONS 3000 PSI 4" +/- 1" 1" SLAB -ON -GRADE: FOOT TRAFFIC 3000 PSI 4" +/- 1" 1" TIE BEAMS AND TIE COLUMNS 3000 PSI (MAX 50' BETWEEN COLD JOINTS) BEAMS AND COLUMNS 4000 PSI 4" 1" 1" ELEVATED SLABS (MTL DECK) 3000 PSI 4" +/- 1" 3/8" 4111 FILLED CELL, PRECAST COARSE LINTELS 4 BOND BEAM GROUT 2500 PSI 8" TO 11" GROUT: 3/8" FINE GROUT: (ASTM C4-1(o) - SEE NOTE 2 NONE NOTES: I. SLUMP FOR RAMPS AND SLOPING SURFACES SHALL NOT EXCEED 4" 2. SEE MASONRY NOTE M21 FOR TESTING REQUIREMENTS OF GROUT TO BE USED TO FILL GORES OF CMU. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTALS: 1- EACH MIX DESIGN SHALL BE LABELED TO INDICATE THE AREA IN WHICH THE CONCRETE IS TO BE PLACED (I.E. FOUNDATIONS, SLAB- ON -GRADE, COLUMNS, ETC.). FAILURE TO DO SO WILL CAUSE DELAY AND/OR REJECTION OF SUBMITTALS. 2. PROPOSED MIX DESIGN SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH METHOD 1 OR METHOD 2 OF ACI 301. PROVIDE SUPPORTING DATA IN TABULAR FORM FOR EACH SEPARATE PROPOSED MIX. 3. SUBMIT CONCRETE MIX DESIGN FOR EACH PROPOSED CLASS OF CONCRETE, REBAR SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM-615 GRADE 60. WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A-185 AND SHALL BE LAPPED MINIMUM ONE MESH + 2" WHERE SPLICED. ALL REINFORCING SHALL BE DOMESTICALLY PRODUCED. SPLICES AND ANCHORAGE OF REINFORCING SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED): WELDED WIRE FABRIC: 8" ALL OTHER: 48 DIA (12'' MIN) REINFORCEMENT IN WALLS, FOOTINGS AND BEAMS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS AND LAPPED 48 BAR DIA AT SPLICE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. HOOK AND LAP ALL CORNER AND INTERSECTING BARS. (SEE REINF DEVELOPMENT DETAIL). 484> LAP SPLICE (TYP) eda Id• EXTEND INTERIOR BARS TO 1; a•° FAR FACE (TYP, NO NOOKS ° OR CORNER BARS REQ'D) I,d. STD HOOK (TYP) I ` I.•d a 1.`d. CORNER BAR (TYP) - I `` Oil MATCH OF HORIZONTAL 8 (TYP) BARS (TYP) e d L a SEE GEN NOTES FOR REQ'D COVER (TYP) CORNER INTERSECTION REINF DEVELOPMENT DETAIL CONCRETE AND REINFORCING CONT'D C8 COVER FOR REINFORCING SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: C9 CONCRETE CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH: 311 CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER: *6 THRU *18 BARS: 2" *5 BAR, W31 OR D31 WIRE AND SMALLER; 1 1/2" CONCRETE NOT EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER: SLABS, WALLS, JOISTS: *14 AND *18 BARS: 1 1/2" *11 BAR AND SMALLER: 3/4" BEAMS, COLUMNS: PRIMARY REINF, TIES, STIRRUPS, SPIRALS: 1 1/2" SHELLS, FOLDED PLATE MEMBERS: *6 BAR AND LARGER: 3/4" *5 BAR, W31, OR D31 WIRE AND SMALLER: 1/2" STEPPED FOOTING DETAIL (IF REQUIRED): SEE PLAN FOR 36 O LAP LOCATION 2" CLR T/ FTG dk EL SEE FDN d ` PLAN T/ FTG S , dCLR EL EE (TYP) FDN PLAN FTG REINF (SEE SCH) QI REINF SAME AS THAT IN FDN SCH MATCH FTG THICKNESS FTG REINF (SEE SCH) DETAIL - STEPPED FOOTING PENETRATION DETAILS: TYP FTG REINF NOTE: PIPE MUST BE 90' TY (±10°) TO WALL FTG FTGTCH REINFP WRAP PIPE WITH A MINIMUM 1" THICK MIN 18" COMPRESSIBLE PIPE INSULATION FOR ENTIRE WIDTH OF FTG + 4" MIN EACH SIDE T/ FTG EL SEE FDN e PLAN d° MIN OPTION 1 A( FTG AFTER P I P E� TYP FTG REINF NOTE: PIPE MUST BE 90' MATCH TYP (±10') TO WALL FTG FTG RE INF SLEEVE (2 SIZES LARGER MIN 18" THAN PIPE) FOR ENTIRE WIDTH OF FTG + 4" MIN EACH SIDE T/ FTG EL " d SEE FDN d d d e n PLAN d <Q a �i� j a j jja 1 j 10 6 MIN OPTION 1 B (FTG BEFORE PIPE WALL FOOTING, SEE WALL - SEE FOUNDATION PLAN FOUNDATION AND SCHEDULE FOR PLAN SIZE AND REINF. _ (k 0 HOOK EDGE / ADD'L BAR *5x5'-O" BAR P LAN V1 EW / DOWNSPOUT, FTG 4 WALL COORD INATE WALL - SEE WITH ARGH'L FOUNDATION PLAN AND CIVIL DWGS I NOTE: 41DD'L BAR, CONFIGURATION OF SEE ABOVE PIPE MAY VARY. _ T/ FTG EL COORD W/ CIVIL DWGS. z SEE FDN PLAN ' ' Q L W ' W U 3" CLR SEE FDN SCH (TYP) OPTION 2 (NOTCH IN FTG) DETAIL - FOOTING PENETRATIONS �4ANDRA I L HRl HANDRAILS SHALL BE DESIGNED PER APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE (SEE D1). FABRICATOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS SIGNED AND SEALED BY A REGISTERED FLORIDA ENGINEER TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR APPROVAL. B • B • M m 0 B•B•M STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS $ Orlando Boca Raton Q P:407.645.3423 0 F:407.645 3790 = 1912 Boothe Circle • Suite 100 Of Longwood, FL 32750 0 bbma.com EB5343 Bora Erbilen P.E. #55996 ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS, THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRTTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MI DDLEBROOKS ASSOCIATES", NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. U z w z O N0 Lr.Ln V Q U_w Z 00 W �Z U c�O CwQ JU GQWLL LU < LLJ N2W W �MH� U J J r w M 06 U) 0 00< � J Q J Z X�,0 � JYMU �U)a-0 U o Uj Q-0Na a W w 0 z J I!� ~ I C) U) J L1J W z J � w w V W U) 0 0 0 E U) x a U Q W J W W O I� Z O O � o W W CD z V LU N WC) M 0 Q Q 2 rS001 File=C: \Users\JBROWE-1.BBM\AppData\Local\Temp\AcPublish_2756\07122_PCS001.dwg Tab=PCS001 Date/Time= Apr 17, 2008 - 10: 43am Plot by jbrower 1�,450Nfi��' M1 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND INSPECTIONS SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST EDITION OF THE ACI BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE MASONRY STRUCTURES (ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402-02), SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES (AS[ 530PASCE 6/TM5 602-02) ASTM C476, ASTM G1O19, AND NCMA TEK 101 M2 CONCRETE BLOCKS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C-9O. (f'm = 1500 PSI) (1900 PSI ON THE NET AREA). M3 MORTAR SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM C270, TYPE M FOR RETAINING WALLS AND WALLS BELOW GRADE, TYPE S FOR TYPICAL WALLS. (COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH = 2500 PSI AND 1800 PSI, RESPECTIVEL T . SITE TESTED MORTAR CUBES SHALL ACHIEVE A MINIMUM OF 30% OF THE DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH) M4 BLOCK SHALL NOT BE MOISTENED BEFORE GROUTING. M5 ALL MASONRY GROSS WEBS SHALL BE FULLY BEDDED IN MORTAR AROUND CELLS TO BE GROUTED. M6 REINFORCE WALLS WITH LADDER TYPE (ASTM A-82, #9 GAGE WIRE) DEFORMED REINFORCEMENT EQUAL TO DURO-WALL IN BED JOINTS AT ION CC, UNO, MEASURED VERTICALLY. PLACE PER I-FiR INSTRUCTIONS. LAP ALL HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING 6" MIN. M1 VERTICAL REINFORCING MUST HAVE A MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 1/2" TO INSIDE FACE. VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT IN WALLS SHALL BE SECURED AND LATERALLY SUPPORTED AGAINST DISPLAGEMENT AT INTERVALS NOT EXCEEDING 192x(5AR DIAMETER) OR 10 FT (WHICHEVER IS LESS) WHENEVER A CLEANOUT IS REQUIRED. SEE GROUTING DETAIL NOTE FOR CLEANOUT REQUIREMENTS. MS GROUT PLACEMENT STOPPED FOR (1) HOUR OR MORE SHOULD BE STOPPED 1 1/2" BELOW THE TOP OF THE MASONRY UNIT TO PROVIDE A KEY FOR SUBSEQUENT GROUTING. M9 TYPICAL VERTICAL REINFORCING SIZE AND SPACING SHALL BE ABOVE AND BELOW ALL WALL OPENINGS. M10 TEMPORARY BRACING AND SHORING OF WALLS TO PROVIDE STABILITY DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. M11 PROVIDE FILLED PRECAST U-LINTELS AS MANUFACTURED BY CAST- CRETE OR APPROVED EQUAL WITH (1) #5 CONT AT ALL OPENINGS WHERE BEAMS ARE NOT SHOWN, SCHEDULED OR NOTED. L [NTELS SHALL HAVE MINIMUM UNFILLED CAPACITY OF 400 Ib/LF AND BEAR NOMINAL 6" (MIN 6") EACH END ON A GROUT FILLED CELL. PROVIDE PRE -CAST LINTEL SUBMITTALS SIGNED AND SEALED BY A SPECIALTY ENGINEER WHO IS REGISTERED IN THE SAME STATE AS THE PROJECT LOCATION. M12 STOPPING AND RESUMING WORK: RACK BACK 1/2-UNIT LENGTH IN EACH COURSE. DO NOT TOOTH. CLEAN EXPOSED SURFACES OF SET MASONRY. REMOVE LOOSE MASONRY UNITS AND MORTAR PRIOR TO LAYING FRESH MASONRY. M13 REINFORCE MASONRY OPENINGS GREATER THAN 1'-0" WIDE, WITH HORIZ JOINT REINF PLACED IN (2) HORIZ JOINTS APPROXIMATELY S" APART, IMMEDIATELY ABOVE THE LINTEL AND IMMEDIATELY BELOW THE SILL. EXTEND REINFORCING A MINIMUM OF 2'-0" BEYOND JAMBS OF THE OPENING EXCEPT AT CONTROL JOINTS. SEE PLAN FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. M14 DO NOT APPLY UNIFORM LOADS TO MASONRY WALLS POP, (3) DAYS. M15 DO NOT APPLY CONCENTRATED LOADS TO MASONRY WALLS FOR Cl) DAYS. MI6 EXTEND ALL VERTICAL WALL REINFORCEMENT TO WITHIN 2" OF TOP OF WALL OR BEAM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. TERMINATE REINFORCING WITH STANDARD ACI 9O DEGREE HOOK IF ROOF JOISTS AND/OR TRUSSES BEAR ON TOP OF WALL AND THERE IS NO PARAPET. IF PARAPET EXISTS, HOOK IS NOT REQUIRED. M17 MAXIMUM CONTROL JOINT SPACING FOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS. SPACING FOR CONTROL JOINTS 3 x WALL HEIGHT = SPACING IN FT (NOT TO EXCEED 50'-0") M18 REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR WATERPROOFING DETAILS AT MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS. M19 GROUT FOR FILLED CELLS SHALL BE PLACED IN CONFORMANCE WITH ACI 530.1 AND AS INDICATED BELOW: MAX HEIGHT OF GROUT LIFT = 5' - 0" CONSOLIDATE BY MECHANICAL VIBRATION PER ACI 530.1. ONE OR MORE GROUT LIFTS CONSTITUTE A GROUT POUR. SEE NOTE C3 FOR GROUT PROPERTIES W U IF WALL IS LAID UP NO GREATER THAN 5'-01' IN HEIGHT ABOVE THE FOOTING OR PREVIOUS N GROUT POUR(S), A GLEAN -OUT HOLE SHALL (L NOT BE REQUIRED. OTHERWISE, PROVIDE CLEAN -OUT HOLE WITH MINIMUM SIZE OF 3"x3 OVERHANGING MORTAR AND DEBRIS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM INSIDE THE CELL WALLS. V. d ` SEAL PRIOR TO GROUTING BUT AFTER INSPECTION. NOTE5: 1. DO NOT GROUT UNTIL MORTAR HAS SET SUFFICIENTLY TO WITHSTAND THE PRESSURE OF THE GROUT. WAIT NOT LESS THAN 24 HOURS. 2. PLACE GROUT WITHIN 90 MINUTES FROM INTRODUCING WATER IN THE MIXTURE AND PRIOR TO INITIAL SET. 3. MAXIMUM WALL HEIGHT FROM TOP OF FOOTING OR PREVIOUS GROUT POURS LAID UP AT ONE TIME SHALL BE 12'-0" FOR COARSE GROUT 4 24'-0" FOR FINE GROUT. A GROUT POUR CONSISTS OF ONE OR MORE LIFTS. 4. THE MINIMUM CONTINUOUS UNOBSTRUCTED CLEAR AREA IN CELL TO RECEIVE GROUT MUST BE NOT LESS THAN 3 "x3 ". MORTAR FINS MUST BE REMOVED AS BLOCK PLACEMENT PROCEEDS. MORTAR DROPPINGS MUST BE KEPT OUT OF CELLS WHICH ARE TO BE GROUTED. GROUTING DETAIL- M21 JOB SITE MIXING OF GROUT SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. TESTING SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM G1019. SEE TEST MOLD DETAIL BELOW. SEE SCHEDULE UNDER CONCRETE NOTES FOR COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AND SLUMP REQUIREMENTS. GROUT TEST PRISM I I / � I ; COVER UNITS USING ABSORPTIVE PAPER TOWELLING W1 TAPE (4) SxSx16 CMU BLOCKS REQUIRED (FRONT BLOCK 3"x3"xl 5/5" WOOD BLOCK REMOVED FOR CLARITY) DETAIL - MASONRY GROUT TEST MOLD (ASTM C-1019) M20 TYPICAL MASONRY DETAILS: DOOR OPENING (SEE NOTE 4) SEE PLANS FOR ADD'L PILLED CELLS REQ'D AT OPENINGS WINDOW OPNG 40 (SEE NOTE 4) TYP INTERIOR LOAD -BEARING CMU WALL ON FOOTING TYP INTERIOR NON -LOAD -SEARING CMU WALL ON THICKENED SLAB TYPICAL SPACING TYP EXTERIOR LOAD -BEARING CMU WALL ON FOOTING — q C NOTES: 1. SEE DETAIL "DC)" FOR LOCATING MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT MCJ PLAN TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL, 2. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR OPENING SIZES AND LOCATIONS. 3. SEE FDN PLAN NOTES FOR REINFORCED FILLED CELL SIZE 4 SPACING. 4. MULTIPLE FILLED CELLS MAY BE REQUIRED AT JAMBS. ADDITIONAL BARS WILL BE SHOWN ON PLAN(S), IF NONE ARE SHOWN, THEN A SINGLE TYPICAL REINFORCED JAMB CELL IS SUFFICIENT. 5. SEE MASONRY NOTES ON GENERAL NOTE SHEETS FOR HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING AND OTHER ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ILLUSTRATIVE PLAN OF VARIOUS CMU WALL CONDITIONS "5 PRE -FAE 'IT" JOINT INTERSEC M,45ONR'I WALL INTERSECTION JOINT RE SHALL B CONTINUO IN BOTH DIRECTIC INTERSEC MASONR', WALL INTERSECTION. Lj Lj I M22 MINIMUM LAP SPLICES FOR REINFORCED GMU PER 2004 FBC (WITH 2O06 SUPPLEMENT) SECTION 2101.2.3: #4, #5 Oro#1 *10#9 (NOTE 1) #10 (NOTE 2) 3211 {011 all 5/ o / il' 7211 NOTES: 1. NOT ALLOWED IN 8" CMU BUT ACCEPTABLE FOR 12" CMU. MAXIMUM BAR DIAMETER SHALL NOT EXCEED ONE -EIGHTH OF THE NOMINAL WALL THICKNESS. 2. REINFORCING BARS LARGER THAN #9 SHALL BE SPLICED USING MECHANICAL CONNECTORS. 5TfRUCTUfR,4L STEEL 551 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD INSPECTIONS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS (IF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. 662 FABRICATE AND ERECT STRUCTURAL STEEL IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE AISC "SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS". 633 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS: ALL STEEL SHALL BE PRODUCED DOMESTICALLY. ROLLED SHAPES, PLATES AND BARS: ASTM A36, EXCEPT WIDE -FLANGE 4 WT SECTIONS, WHICH SHALL BE ASTM A992. HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTION (HSS). ASTM 4500, GRADE B. ANCHOR BOLTS, RODS, NUTS AND WASHERS: PER BASE PLATE SCHEDULE. HEADED STUDS: ASTM 410a, GRADE 1015 THROUGH 1020, COLD -FINISHED CARBON STEEL, AWS D1.1, TYPE B. BOLTED STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL BOLTS SHALL BE 3/4"� ASTM A325, TYPE N. BOLTS INDICATED LESS THAN 5/0"4) SHALL BE ASTM 4301. WELDED CONNECTIONS: ELECTRODES - E-10XX UNO (LOW HYDROGEN). FILLET WELDS SHALL BE 3/16" UNO. S64 HIGH -STRENGTH FIELD -BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE INSTALLED, TIGHTENED, TESTED AND INSPECTED ACCORDING TO "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS" BY THE RESEARCH COUNCIL ON STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS (RCSC). ALL 4325N BOLTS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO A "SNUG -TIGHT" CONDITION, AS DEFINED IN THE SPECIFICATION. SLIP -CRITICAL (SC) BOLTS MUST BE FULLY TENSIONED PER SPECIFICATION. WALL SEALANT - SEE r ARCH DWGS AND \— OR SPECS EXTERIOR LOAD - BEARING WALL PROVIDE ADD'L INTERIOR NON -LOAD - REINFORCED BEARING WALL ON FILLED CELL THICKENED SLAB INTERSECTION OF LOAD-BRG & NON-LOAD-BRG WALLS � z t �o z 3/S W x 11� D VERT � p °� � � STIRRUPS- UPS SEE (DUMMY) JOINT EACH - q 0 SCH FOR SIZE SIDE OF TIE BEAMS 4 TO AND SPACING -7 ADJUST STIRRUP \—REINF IS CONTINUOUS LOCATION SLIGHTLY TO AT CONTROL JOINT CLEAR JOINT BY MIN 2" IN CONS TIE BEAM MCJ Q TIE BEAM SEALANT - SEE ARCH DWGS AND OR SPECS. FILLED CELL W/ TYP WALL REINF EA SIDE OF MCJ BOND BEAM REINF 1/2" THROUGH -WALL CONTINUOUS AT MCJ VERTICAL CONTROL JOINT MCJ @ BOND BEAM STOP VERTS 2" FROM TOP OF WALL. HOOK MAY BE REQ'D, SEE NOTE M16 VERT BAR CENTERED IN FILLED CELL DOWELS SAME AS VERT BARS HORIZ JOINT REINF 0 16" CC. VERT SPACING STANDARD HOOK (ALTERNATE SIDES) TYPICAL FILLED CELL. DETAILS SEALANT - SEE ARCH PILLED CELL W/ TYP WALL DWGS AND OR SPECS. REINF EA SIDE OF MCJ aq .��1/2" THROUGH -WALL VERTICAL CONTROL JOINT NOTES. 1. THROUGH -WALL JOINT SHALL BE CONTINUOUS WITHOUT INTERRUPTION FROM FOUNDATION TO TOP OF WALL. 2. TERMINATE TYPICAL HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING 2" FROM JOINT. 3. MAXIMUM SPACING OF CONTROL JOINTS SHALL BE 3 x (WALL HEIGHT) OR 50'-0" WHICHEVER IS LESS. MAS CONTROL JOINT (MCJ) STIRUCTUSAL 5TEEL CONT'F—) 655 THE SHEAR CONNECTIONS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED AND THE NECESSARY INFORMATION MAY BE FOUND IN THE SCHEDULES. THE DOUBLE ANGLE/DOUBLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS SHALL BE USED FOR ALL GIRDERS AND THE SINGLE ANGLE/SINGLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS SHALL BE USED FOR ALL BEAMS. THE ULTIMATE (i.e. FACTORED) REACTIONS HAVE SEEN PROVIDED AT EACH END OF EACH MEMBER SHOULD THE FABRICATOR WISH TO RE -ENGINEER THE CONNECTIONS TO THEIR PREFERENCES. SHOULD THE FABRICATOR WISH TO RE -ENGINEER THE CONNECTIONS, THEY MUST PROVIDE SUBMITTALS THAT HAVE BEEN PREPARED AND SIGNED AND SEALED BY A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER LICENSED IN THE SAME STATE AS THE PROJECT LOCATION. 556 BRACE AND MAINTAIN ALL STEEL IN ALIGNMENT UNTIL OTHER PARTS OF CONSTRUCTION NECESSARY FOR PERMANENT SUPPORT ARE COMPLETED. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLING TEMPORARY SHORING AS REQUIRED FOR THE STABILITY OF THE STEEL FRAME UNTIL ALL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED AND BUILDING IS ENCLOSED. 6S7 ALL WELDING SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF "THE STANDARD CODE FOR WELDING IN BUILDING CONSTRUCTION" OF THE AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY. SSS GROUT FOR COLUMN BASE PLATES AND PRESET BEARING PLATES SHALL BE NON -SHRINK, NON-METALLIC GROUT (5000 PSI MIN), S59 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS INDICATING ALL SHOP AND ERECTION DETAILS INCLUDING PROFILES, SIZES, SPACING AND LOCATIONS OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, CONNECTION ATTACHMENTS, FASTENERS, LOADS AND TOLERANCES. 5510 ALL STEEL EXPOSED TO WEATHER SHALL BE HOT DIP GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM 4123 FOR MEMBERS AND ASTM 4153 FOR CONNECTION ELEMENTS. 5511 STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL RECEIVE A SHOP COAT OF PRIMER (COLOR AS DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT) WHERE EXPOSED TO VIEW. ALL OTHER AREAS, INCLUDING THOSE WHICH WILL RECEIVE SPRAY -ON FIRE PROTECTION, OR WHERE HEADED STUDS ARE TO BE WELDED, SHALL NOT BE PRIMED, 5512 STEEL BEAMS SHALL BE CAMBERED AS INDICATED ON THE FRAMING PLAN(S). IF NO CAMBER IS SPECIFIED, THE FABRICATOR SHALL ENSURE THAT THE "NATURAL" CAMBER IN ALL ERECTED BEAMS OCCURS IN AN UPWARD DIRECTION. 6513 THE STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE FABRICATED AND ERECTED IN FULL CONFORMANCE WITH THE "OSHA STEEL ERECTION STANDARD". IF THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS DEVIATE FROM THE OSHA STANDARD THEN THE PABRICATOR SHALL PROVIDE SUBMITTALS THAT CLEARLY INDICATE THE DEVIATION WITH A REVISION CLOUD AND REQUEST APPROVAL FROM BBM TO MAKE THE CHANGE SO THAT CONFORMANCE WITH THE OSHA STANDARD IS ASSURED. AAC AUTOCLAVED AERATED Ib, # POUND(S) CONCRETE LG LONG AB ANCHOR BOLT LL LIVE LOAD ABV ABOVE LLBB LONG LEG BACK-TO-BACK A.C.I. AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL ADDL ADDITIONAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR LNTL LINTEL AGGR AGGREGATE LSL LONG SLOTTED A.I.S.C. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL LOG LOCATION CONSTRUCTION LONG LONGITUDINAL A.I.S.i, AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL LP LOW POINT INSTITUTE LW LONG WAY AL ALUMINUM ALT ALTERNATE MAS MASONRY AR ANCHOR ROD MAX MAXIMUM ARCH ARCHITECTURAL) MB MACHINE BOLT ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING MBM METAL BUILDING MFR MATERIALS MC MOMENT CONNECTION A.W.S. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY MCJ MASONRY CONTROL JT ME MONOLITHIC EDGE B/ BOTTOM OF MESH MECHANICAL BB BOND BEAM MEZZ MEZZANINE BLDG BUILDING MP MONOLITHIC FOOTING BLW BELOW MFR MANUFACTURE(ER) BM BEAM MIN MINIMUM BOT BOTTOM MISS MISCELLANEOUS BP BASE PLATE MO MASONRY OPENING BRDG BRIDGING MS METAL STUD BRG BEARING MTL METAL BRK BRICK MWF MONOLITHIC WALL FOOTING BS BOTH SIDES BTJ BOLTED TIE JOIST NIC NOT IN CONTRACT BTWN BETWEEN NS NEAR SIDE NTS NOT TO SCALE C/C CENTER TO CENTER CANT CANTILEVER CA OVERALL CB CONCRETE SEAM OC ON CENTER CC CONCRETE COLUMN OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER CFS COLD -FORMED STEEL OF OUTSIDE FACE SIP CAST -IN -PLACE OH OPPOSITE HAND / OVERHEAD CJ CONSTRUCTION JOINT (OR OPNG OPENING CONTROL JOINT) OPP OPPOSITE �, CL CENTERLINE CLIR CLEARANCE) PAP POWDER -ACTUATED CM CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PASTENER(S) CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT PB PRE -CAST BEAM COL COLUMN PEMB PRE-ENGINEERED METAL CONS CONCRETE BUILDING CONN CONNECTION PERP PERPENDICULAR CONT CONTINUOUS PC PRECAST CONTR CONTRACTOR iE, PL PLATE SCORE) COORD INATE PLS PLACES CSK COUNTER SINK PLF POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT STIR, CENTER PLYWD PLYWOOD CTRD CENTERED PNL PANEL CY CUBIC YARD PSF POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH DBA DEFORMED BAR ANCHOR PTN PARTITION D I14 DIAMETER D IAG D IAGONAL R RADIUS DL DEAD LOAD RC REINFORCED CONCRETE DN DOWN REF REFERENCE DTL DETAIL REINF REINFORCED) (ING) DWG DRAWING REQ REQUIRE DWL DOWEL REQ'D REQUIRED RF ROOF EA EACH RM ROOM EE EACH END RP RADIUS POINT EF EACH FACE RTN RETURN EJ EXPANSION JOINT RW RETAINING WALL ENG ENGINEER E05 EDGE OF SLAB SCH SCHEDULE EL ELEVATION SDI STEEL DECK INSTITUTE EQ EQUAL SECT SECTION EQ SP EQUAL SPACE(S) (ING) SF STEPPED FOOTING ES EACH SIDE SHT SHEET EW EACH WAY SIM SIMILAR EXP EXPANSION SJ SAWGUT JOINT EXT EXTERIOR SJI STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE SL SLOPE F/ FACE OF SLBB SHORT LEG BACK-TO-BACK FBC FLORIDA BUILDING CODE SOG SLAB ON GRADE FD FLOOR DRAIN SP SPACE(S) PDN FOUNDATION SPECS SPECIFICATIONS FP FINISHED FLOOR SQ SQUARE FIN FL FINISH SS STAINLESS STEEL PLG FLOOR FLANGE SSL SHORT SLOTTED FMG FRAMING STD STANDARD FS FAR SIDE STIFFR STIFFENER FT FOOT FTG FOOTING STL STEEL ea GAUGE STIR STRENGTH GALV GALVANIZED) STiRL STRUCTURAL GB GRADE BEAM SW SHORT WAY / SHEAR WALL GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR SYMM SYMMETRICAL GFC GROUT FILLED CELL(S) / COURSE SYP SOUTHERN YELLOW PINE GLB GLU-LAM BEAM GR GRADE T45 TOP AND BOTTOM TB TIE BEAM HC HOLLOW -CORE TC TIE COLUMN HK HOOK TEMP TEMPERATURE HORIZ HORIZONTAL THK THICK HP HIGH POINT TOPG TOPPING HS HEADED STUD TRANS TRANSVERSE HSS HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTION TYP TYPICAL T/ TOP OF ID INSIDE DIAMETER UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IF INSIDE FACE INT INTERIOR VIP VERIFY IN FIELD VERT VERTICAL JST JOIST JT JOINT WD WOOD WF WALL FOOTING K KIP WO WINDOW OPENING (MASONRY) KO KNOCK -OUT WP WORKING POINT WS WATERSTOP WIUF WELDED WIRE FABRIC W/ WITH ELEVATION SYMBOL GRID ID NORTH NORTH ARROW A REVISION MARK TYPICAL PLAN KEYNOTE SYMBOL SECTION CUTS NUMBER FOR SECTION LETTER FOR DETAIL SHEET ON WHICH SECTION OR DETAIL OCCURS SECTION & DETAIL ID NUMBER FOR SECTION LETTER FOR DETAIL rl TITLE TYPICAL LINETYPES GRID LINE ---------------------------- EXISTING -- MATCH LINE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HIDDEN -- DASHED CONTINUOUS MATERIALS 8" CMU LOAD GROUT BRG WALLS CON PLANS) _ 7777777777 PRECAST CONCRETE 8" CMU NON - LOAD BRG WALLS (ON STEEL PLANS) EARTH CONCRETE SHEET N'M3-F SYMBOL LEGEND B•B•M a e 0 B•B•M STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS $ Orlando Boca Raton m P:407.645.3423 0 F:407.645.3790 = 1912 Boothe Circle • Suite 100 W Longwood, FL 32750 L bbma.com U EB5343 Bora Erbilen P.E. #55996 ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WTHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLEBROOKS ASSOCIATES", NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. (U O v' p U U Mp ^l J� O/t U w 0 > E p dpo Uw C�la � U b Z W Z 0 O V Q Uw Z 00 ,Uj L.L (D Z UCo WQ_jQ �Q LL � NN � Q LU L.L. New w � cy) W J U U) J W N 06 c 0 0 J LL Q —I Z X0_3 � 10 �YU z ~ U o =)U) 0- U) 0—YYN0- W a. U) z 0 Q Lij Of m m Q 0 z Q U) W 0 z J U ZD U) w w zJ ~ W H- V w w ti 0 M a 0 cn E U) x a a W w d z rn o cD Uj LU CD z N ~ U m Lu Q� W Q 2' 2 d 0 U PCS002 File=F: \2007\07122\07122_TECH\07122_SDWGS\07122—Sdwgs\PUBLIX\07122_PCS002.dwg Tab=PCS002 Date/Time= Apr 17, 2008 — 10: 43am Plot by jbrower STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES L IGHTG AC-:;E t'IETAL FRA1 " I ING-r LMF1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD INSPECTIONS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPEGIFiGATIONS CIF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. LMF2 CONNECT STEEL STUDS AND TRACKS TO 436 STEEL OR CONCRETE WITH (2) FASTENERS (PAP) AT EACH STUD, AND CONNECT STEEL STUDS AND TRACKS TO EACH OTHER WITH (2) *a -la SCREWS AT EACH STUD (TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND EXTENTS OF STEEL STUD WORK. LMF3 LMF4 NOTE: "POWDER ACTUATED FASTENER (PAF)" REFERS TO 0.1450 SHANK DOMED -HEAD, LOW -VELOCITY POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS AS MANUFACTURED BY POWERS RAWL OR APPROVED EQUAL WITH MINIMUM CAPAGITIES AS FOLLOW&: IN 3000 PSI CONCRETE: 1 1/2" PENETRATION = 155# PULLOUT 4 225* SHEAR IN 436 STEEL: 1/4" MATERIAL = 430# PULLOUT 4 660# SHEAR (PIN MUST FULLY PENETRATE THE MATERIAL BY 1/4" MINIMUM) STEEL STUDS SHALL MEET FOLLOWING DESIGN CRITERIA: GALV G-60 A&TM A525, MINIMUM YIELD STRESS SHALL 5E 50,000 PSI FOR 12ga, 14ga, 16ga AND 33000 PSI FOR laga 4 20ga. STUD SIZE EFFECTIVE MINIMUM I EFFECTIVE MINIMUM 8 3 5/8"x16 GA 3549 .438a 3 5/a"x1a GA 6941 .3652 3 5/8"x20 GA .5354 26Oa 4"xl6 GA 1.0752 .502-1 4"x1a GA a-122 .41-11 4"x20 GA .6722 2589 6"x16 GA 23033 aa-12 6 "xla GA 2.26-15 .132a 6"40 GA 11427 .5234 0"x14 GA 6.94-1-i L-1007 a"x16 GA 5.62g4 1.34-10 ,5"x1a GA 4.5454 1.10-1a a"x20 GA 3.4a-6 .6684 NOTES: 1. NOT ALL SIZES MAY 5E USED. SEE PLANS AND SECTIONS FOR SIZE(S) REQUIRED, (SIZES AND GAGES ON STRUCTURAL DWGS SHALL GOVERN OVER ARCHITECTURAL DLG&) 2. ALL SIZES SHALL HAVE 1-5/0" FLANGES. BRACING DURING CONSTRUCTION: PROVIDE 1 1/2'' GOLD -ROLLED CHANNELS OR HORIZONTAL STRAP BRACING FOR WALLS IMMEDIATELY AFTER STUDS ARE ERECTED, LMF5 EXECUTION: POSITION STUDS VERTICALLY IN RUNNERS AND SPACE NO GREATER THAN 16". SECURELY ANCHOR EACH STUD TO RUNNER WITH (4) 00-10 LOW -PROFILE SCREWS, TWO AT TOP AND TWO AT BOTTOM, WITH ONE SCREW IN EACH FLANGE. TRACKS SHALL BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS. AT TRACK BUTT JOINTS, ABUTTING PIECES OF TRACK SHALL BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO A COMMON STRUCTURAL ELEMENT, OR THEY SHALL BE BUTT -WELDED OR &PLIGED TOGETHER. JACK STUDS OR CRIPPLES SHALL BE INSTALLED BELOW WINDOW SILLS, ABOVE WINDOW AND DOOR HEADS, AT FREE STANDING STAIR RAILS, AND ELSEWHERE TO FURNISH SUPPORT, AND SHALL 5E SECURELY ATTACHED TO SUPPORTING: MEMBERS. PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURE VERTICAL MOVEMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED WHERE INDICATED ON THE PLANS. SPLICES IN AXIALLY LOADED STUDS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. LMF6 EXTERIOR SHEATHING: ATTACH GYPSUM SHEATHING TO EXTERIOR OF EACH STUD WITH 1" TYPE(S) 5-12 COATED &GREW& SPACED 3/a" FROM ENDS AND EDGES AND AT APPROXIMATELY a" CC, LMF-I LATERAL BRACING (HORIZONTAL BRIDGING) FOR WALLS: (NOTE: IF NON -LOAD -BEARING WALLS (PARTITION WALLS OR CURTAIN WALLS) HAVE SHEATHING ON BOTH SIDES, LATERAL BRACING IS NOT REQUIRED.) ENSURE BOTH STUD FLANGES ARE ATTACHED TO TOP AND BOTTOM RUNNER FLANGES. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING MUST BE INSTALLED AT SPACING NOT TO EXCEED 45" CC; FOR AXIAL LOAD BEARING WALLS AND 60" OC MEASURED VERTICALLY FOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALLS CARRYING WIND LOAD ONLY. (TYPICAL FOR ALL OPTIONS BELOW.) (1) #10 (TYP) 16ga V-BAR BRIDGING ATTACHED TO BOTH FLANGES. SEE NOTES FOR SPACING. MTL STUD - SEE PLAN HORIZONTAL BRIDGING - OPTION #1 TYPE 6-12 LOW PROFILE HEAD SCREWS ID BRIDGING RUNNER) 1 1/2"-20 GAGE STRAP BRIDGING STUD HORIZONTAL BRIDGING CONSISTS OF CUT -TO -LENGTH RUNNER FOR SOLID BRIDGING AND STEEL STRAPS ON BOTH SIDES OF STUD, SOLID BRIDGING: IS PLACED AT EA END OF WALL, ADJACENT TO WALL OPENINGS AND a'-O" OG MAX, MEASURED VERTICALLY. RUNNER HAS WEB PLANGE BENT AT EACH END AND IS SECURED TO EACH STUD FLANGE WITH ONE 5/a" TYPE 6-12 LOW PROFILE SCREW. STRAP BRIDGING OF 1 1/2" WIDE BY 20ga STEEL IS FASTENED TO EACH STUD FLANGE WITH ONE 5/0" TYPE 6-12 &GREW AND TO EACH RUNNER FLANGE WITH FOUR SCREWS. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING - OPTION #2 1 1/2'' COLD ROLLED CHANNELS MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF A50VE DETAIL TO BRACE STUDS LATERALLY. CHANNELS ARE INSERTED THROUGH STUD WEB HOLES AND SECURED WITH SCREW -ATTACHED 1 1/2 "x2 "xi6ga CLIP ANGLES CUT TO LENGTH 1/4" LESS THAN STUD WIDTH. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING - OPTION #3 LMFa METAL STUD INSTALLATION: METAL STUDS SHALL EXTEND INTO ALL TRACKS UNTIL IT IS WITHIN 1/2" OF THE TRACK WEB. NO METAL STUD TRACK SHALL EXTEND PAST THE EDGE OF THE SUPPORT MORE THAN ONE THIRD OF ITS WIDTH ( e.g. A 6" TRACK MAY EXTEND BEYOND THE EDGE OF SUPPORT A MAX OF 6/3=2"). B•B•M B•B•M STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Orlando Boca Raton P:407.645.3423 F:407.645.3790 1912 Boothe Circle • Suite 100 Longwood, FL 32750 bbma.com EB5343 Bora Erbilen P.E. #55996 ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRTTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLEBROOKS ASSOCIATES", NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. J 0 0 d Z LW Z O IL Z) O r� V Q UW Z —Q�W (0 Z wM U O Q_jQ GQ � ��QW z �0) w �MHU) J U U) .J J_ 00-0 0— LU N U) Wo 0 � J /a-iZ =jp M JY�U z U 0 0 �(nCL() Q-ONa a W w O z J H U ♦H V J J LU J Z H W LU w V LU CO rl- O C"7 O_ C O N An E U) X LU y U2 Q W J LU X d z M O W NU L cfl e- z F- 0 LU 0 M Of LU Q a 0 0 U PCS003 File=F: \2007\07122\07122—TECH\07122_SDWGS\07122_Sdwgs\PUBLIX\07122_PCS003.dwg Tab=PCS003 Date/Time= Apr 17, 2008 — 10: 43am Plot by jbrower PICA r p� c PCB PCC PCD PCE PICA 6� e PCB PCC L 5e PCD PCE 3 HIGH ROOF FRAMING PLAN Scale 1l8"=1'-0" L Scale 1l8"=1'-0" ROOF FRA" LING PLAN NOTES: 1_ ALL LIGHT GAGE METAL TRUSSES SHALL BE DESIGNED AND CERTIFIED BY TRUSS MANUFACTURER'S REGISTERED ENGINEER. ALL TRUSS -TO -TRUSS CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED AND SPECIFIED BY THE TRUSS MFR. 2. THE TRUSS MANUFACTURER SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL. 3. SEE ARCHITECTURAL BUILDING SECTIONS, STRUCTURAL FRAMING PLANS AND TRUSS ELEVATIONS FOR ROOF PITCHES (TYP). 4. SEE ARCHITECTURAL BUILDING SECTIONS, WALL SECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL FRAMING FLAN(5) FOR BEARING HEIGHTS. PRE-ENG'D METAL TRUSS OVERFRAM ING. NOTE TO GG: ALL TEl IPORARY AND PER„LANENT BRACING FOR THE TRUSS SYSTEM 6HALL BE DESIGNED BY A SPECIALTY ENGINEER. PROVIDE SIGNED AND SEALED SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW PC1 II PC2 I I PC3 ) I PC4 I I PC5 I I PC6 ) ( PC7 ) ( PC8 ) 1 PC9 2'- 13'-4" 14'-0" SEE NOTE 14. I DPCA -,a CiK� Ci PCB F46 F46 PCC — — PCD DP — — 1 FOUNDATION PLAN Scale 1l8"=1'-0" 14'-0" I SEE NOTE 14. I I � I I F46 I cl = F50 Ir I - 15' —8" I' C1 F46 1 S301 18'-3" SEE NOTE 14. CI /T Fa06 0 F46 C2 F46 N 5. TRUSS SPACING SHALL BE MAX 2'-0" CC (UNO). 6. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR FRAMED - DOWN CEILINGS, VOLUME CEILINGS AND OTHER INTERIOR TREATMENTS. -1. SEE PRE -FABRICATED COLD FORMED STEEL TRUSS NOTES IN GENERAL NOTE SHEETS FOR BRIDGING REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL TRUSSES. S. ROOFING SHALL BE PLACED OVER 15/32" A.P.A. RATED, EXPOSURE "i" TYPE PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ 24/0 SPAN RATING. CONNECT PLYWOOD TO METAL TRUSSES W/ #10 TEK SCREWS 6 6" OC EVERYWHERE. 9. SEE SECTIONS FOR STEEL BEAM ELEVATIONS. PRE'-ENG'D METAL TRUSS OVERFRAM ING. NOTE: NO POUJDER ,ACTIVATED FASTENERS NOR EXFANSION BOLTS TO BE USED, ROOF DESIGN LOADS LL�VE DEAD (LOAD LOAD 20 PSF 20 PSF (UNREDUCIBLE) NOTES: 1. SEE TABLE ON SHEET PCS301 FOR GROSS UPLIFT LOADS. 2. SEE PLAN FOR CONCENTRATED LOADS. PRE-ENG'D METAL TRUSS OVERFRAM INC. PC10 PC11 PC13 PPCIT - PC16 PC17 28-1'-OBCCCC 12'- 5 le 12'-5" 14'-5" -6" 10'-2" -6" 1-1'-8" 15'-8" 14'-5" 14'-5 1/2 1 14'-5 1/2" I I I I I I I /-SEE NOTE 14. I I I I C2 C2 F46 FOUNDATION PLAN NOTES �—{- SEE NOTE 15 I G2 F46 11000 L -I CI CI (2 )C3 I C2 I F56 I F46 I F46 If 90F FRI/== F46 — — — — PC21 14'-5 1/2" I PICA PCB PCC PCD PCE PCA S PCB PCC PCD PCE PC22 PC23 PC24 I 13'-9 1/2" 2'- " SEE NOTE 14. — PCA I C1 C1 F46 F56 I PCB J ray PCD 1. REFERENCE THE PUBLIX DRAWINGS FOR SLAB INFORMATION. 6, ALL FTGS ARE CENTERED BENEATH BEARING WALLS AND COLUMNS (TYP, UNO). 2. T/ SLAB EL = 0'-0" (TYP, UNO), REFERENCE ONLY - SEE G CIVIL DWS FOR ACTUAL ELEVATION. 7 TYP SPACING OF FILLED CELLS SHALL APPLY ABOVE AND BELOW OPENINGS ALSO. 3. T/ WALL FTG EL =-(2'-0") (TYP UNO). a. SEE SHEETS PC5001, PCS002 AND PC5003 FOR STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES. 4. T/ GOL FTG EL =-C1'-4") (TYP, UNO). 9. MAINTAIN STRUCTURAL SLAB THICKNESS AT ALL FLOOR B • B • M 5. STEP AND/OR LOWER FOUNDATIONS WHERE SHOWN AND SLOPES AND DEPRESSIONS. AS NECESSARY TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. SEE CONCRETE GENERAL NOTES FOR DETAILS 10. FOR FOUNDATION SCHEDULE SEE SHEET PC5301. AND SECTIONS. PARTICULAR ATTENTION SHALL BE PAID 11 POUR FOOTINGS ON GRID LINE PCA MONOLITHIC WITH TO DOWNSPOUTS ENSURING THAT PROPER ACTIONS HAVE PUBLIX FOOTINGS. BEEN TAKEN TO PREVENT PIPES FROM CONFLICTING WITH THE FOUNDATION SYSTEM. 12. SEE SHEET FG5301 FOR WIND PRESSURE CHARTS. B•B•M 13. EXTEND FOOTING WHERE REQUIRED TO SUPPORT S STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Orlando Boca Raton ARCHITECTURAL COLUMN BASE. P:407 645 3423 F:407.645 3790 14. PROVIDE (3) FILLED CELLS W/ *17 VERT BAR. 1912 Boothe Circle• Suite 100 Longwood, FL 32750 15. PROVIDE 12"x24" GONG. TIE COLUMN (TC1). SEE bbma.com 5343 Bora ErbEen P.E.#55996 2/PC5301 FOR REQUIREMENTS. ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGE OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVE WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTE PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWEL MIDDLEBROOKS ASSOCIATES", NOR ARE THEY TO B ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAININ SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. O � o 0 0 U c1� ao � U •� ra _V U �w W >o E o O w � R a3 U oi kn v 0, a U b z W z 0 n Z) 0 Q UW Z _Qw � �(D J (DZ U M O WQ�¢ Q w —/2Qw �-•� N 2 W LU cy)H(n _J U C) orf LU M 06 C/) Uo 0< LLL _I Z /\OJU LU JY�U z ~ U o �U)0-() Q-�N(L a U) Z Q n 0 CZ G LL LL 0 0 orf M z Q z 0 70 w z J ~ J 0 w w 0 M O 0 .N E U) x U w LIJ a _ 4 o z rn o o W N z V m LU LU IX ¢ PCIS101 File=F: \2007\07122\07122_TECH\07122_SDWGS\07122_Sdwgs\PUBLIX\07122_PCS101.dwg Tab=PCS101 Date/Time= Apr 17, 2008 — 10: 43am Plot by jbrower in N O O O O SEE NOTE NEATLY SAWCUT END OF EVERY NOTE: ♦� M o OTHER COURSE TO ALLOW CELL ROOF TRUSSES NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. TO FILL W/ CONCRETE E ❑NOTES: STEEL BM (HIGH) SEE ARCH DUGS STL COL - SEE FDN PLAN 1. TIE COLUMNS (TC'S) SHALL EXTEND TO NOTE: FOR FINISH I I SECTION A -A OR ROOF LEVELNUNO. NEXT FLOOR COL CAP > MAY NOT I I 1 1 (4) 5/5"4 432F7N BE REQUIRED, COLS 3" MIN ALL 1 1 I BASE fE AND ANCHOR SEE SCH 2. PROVIDE REVEAL (COORD SIZE MAY EXTEND UPWARD. I I I I BOLTS - SEE SCH FOR SIZE AND SHAPE W/ ARCH) AT ALL BOLTS (TYP) AROUND I I I I EXPOSED CONDITIONS. DO NOT CO PEDESTAL. I I 1 1/2" NON -SHRINK GROUT ALLOW TIE COLUMN CONCRETE I PASTE TO PASS BEYOND THE 1 _0 REINF W/ 05 � I I I I -� �, I I HSS 3x3x3/16 W/ REVEAL. I I 1/2"x5 1/2"xO'-9" CAP PLATE EACH CORNER 4 I PLATES TOP EJ (TYP) ° I _ SEE Fl"IG PLAN MAX �" OG #3 I T/ PEDESTAL = I BOTTOM TIES 4" OG FIN FLR EL = 0'-0" .d .. °° .d °• 1 1/2" III III III \ e d- a '. T/ EXT WALKUJAY EL m TIE COL (SEE SCH CLR VARIES -SEE ARCH ° ;. a FOR SIZE REINF) � CIVIL DUJGS (U TIE IN FTG l CLR \, T/ FTG EL a° EXTEND HORIZ JOINT N 1 1 4 I I ?a `. SEE FDN PLAN REINF 6" INTO COL I I REF PCS?01 I I _ SHEAR iF I STL BM -SEE (_ a p �. a d °°..°° ° ° ° ° I d M r d: SEE SCH II w u i� I 1 /2 FMG PLAN = 40 BAR DIA LAP SPLICE FOR TIE I I e O Z� &F 3" CLR (TYP) O = MASONRY LAP SPLICES E R HSS COL - SEE SEE FDN SGH U FDN PLAN CO SEE GENERAL NOT TG1 I I (TYP) p d a a d A (6) 'q VER7 Z U pOWELS W/ STD HOOK #3 TIES -a 12" OC d ° TO MATCH VERT REINF SN3LE=PLATE SHEAR CONNECTM SCHEDULE (SHOP -WELDED, FIELD -BOLTED) BEAM PLATE PLATE FILLET WELD CAPACITY (SIPS) DEPTH; I (SEE OF 3/4" DIA A325N LENGTH "L" THICKNESS SIZE PLAIN) BOLTS (INCHES) (36 KSD (E` 0XX) ASD LRF® a, 10 2 5 1/2 5/16 1/4 20.4 30.6 12,14 3 8 1/2 5/16 1/4 31.0 4-1.1 16 4 11 1/2 5/16 1/4 42.4 63,6 18 5 141/2 5/16 1/4 53.0 _19.5 21 6 li 1/2 5/16 1/4 63.6 95.4 24 7 20 1/2 5/16 1/4 -12.4 111,0 2-1 S 231/2 5/16 1/4 04.1 127.0 30 9 26 1/2 5/16 1/4 94.8 142.0 1 1/2'I NOTES: N 1. FOR BEAMS NOT SHOWN HERE IN, THE SEE SCH FABRICATOR SHALL DESIGN THE SHEAR - FOR NUMBER CONNECTION BASED ON THE REACTION i I OF BOLTS SHOWN ON THE PLAN. _ I I (3" OC) 2 PROVIDE HORIZ SLOTS IN SHEAR PLATE. 3. BEAMS SHALL BE 50 K51. SEE SCH 4, PROVIDE HARDENED WASHER OVER SLOTTED HOLES. S�-4 fi�L�4T D T,4 f L �4fi� 5. BOLTS SHALL BE INSTALLED "SNUG -TIGHT". ow 0 v vv K`Y� SECTION @ EXTERIOR � DETAIL -TIE COLUMN TIE COLUMN TYPES SECTION @ STEEL BM CONN- ATYPICAL BEAM TO HSS COL CONNECTION - \CV HSS COL FTG Ilcv COLUMN8 L�A�E PLATE SCk9EDULE 41147 �R �� . . EASE PLATE SIZE ANCHOR ROD ( (INCHES) (INCHES) - - MARK SIZE COMMENTS A E T E (NOTE 2) fQ C1 HSS 4x4x3/16 10 10 3/4 3/4 10 C2 HSS 5x5x3/16 11 11 3/4 3/4 10 2d 26 N G3 HSS OxOx5/16 14 14 3/4 3/4 10 II All NOTES: 1. ANCHOR RODS SHALL BE ASTM FI554 (GRADE 36) L1N0, THREADED EACH END WITH NUT AT BOTTOM, TACK -WELDED SECURE. PLATE WASHER AT BOTTOM NUT IS NOT REQ'D. CONFORM TO CHART AT RIGHT FOR EMBEDMENT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN SCHEDULE ABOVE,. 2. MAX EMBEDMENT "E" = (FTG THICKNESS) - 5". 3. PLATE WASHERS SHALL HAVE HOLE WITH DIAMETER II ROD MIN MIN MATERIAL EMBEDDED EMBEDDED LENGTH EDGE (NOTE 1) "E" DISTANCE ASTt-1 F1554 12d 5d > 4" (GRADE 3(o) BASE PLATE DETAIL NOT TO SCALE "d" (ROD DIA) Q PLATE WASHERS EQUAL TO ROD DIAMETER + 1/16 . CIRCULAR OR SQUARE WASHERS ARE ACCEPTABLE. 4. IT SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE TO PROVIDE A HEAVY HEX HEAD BOLT O �D0 z Q Ul(Y (SEE SGH FOR SIZE) T/ CONC z a a c) O ° ° (a z a ° ° IN LIEU OF THE THREADED ROD WITH HEAVY HEX NUT AT BOTTOM. ,� (3) HEX NUTS a PER ROD a a � HEAVY HEX NUT, TYP 00 VERSIZE HOLES AND PLATE WASHERMO FOR BASE PLATE$ ROD D DIAMETER HOLE DIAMETER PLATE WASHER ROD RD DIAMETER Oo HLE DIAMETER PLATE WASHER N o 4 o TACK a OR PEEN 3/4" 1 5/16" 1/4"x2 1 1/2" 2 5/16" 1/2"x3 1/2" Z a -1/8" 1 9/16" 5/16"x2 1/2'' 1 3/4" 2 3/4" 5/8"x4" U FACE OF WALL, TOOLED JOINT SHALL BE Z COL OR MADE WITH A "DEEP AND TY 1/2" PRE -MOLDED THIN GROOVER" B GOLDBLATT (PART W EXP JOINT FILLER #843890621 U OR EQUAL Z 4- "&OFF -CUT" &AWCUT JOINT 1/0"xl" DEEP 1 1/2" d:-� TOOLED JOINT (To ry EXPANSION JOINT (NOTE: AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS ONLY) NOTES: 1. CUT SLAB AS SOON AS AGGREGATE DOES Q NOT DISLODGE AND BEFORE CONCRETE U w Z.g ° Z 0 STARTS TO COOL. WAITING PERIOD WILL Q o_o U _\_r,\d /\/ Q Z TYPICALLY VARY FROM 1 HOUR IN HOT. DISCONTINUE J co Z w 0 Z / `°a u z WEATHER TO 4 HOURS IN COLD WEATHER. REINF AT JOINT w U ❑ . _aq . � � 1 L�tl (L 2. PLACE REINFORCING 1 1/2" CLEAR. lx2 KEY U_ Q A� ^ \� 3. HAND -TOOL JOINT TO FACE OF WALL � - Q Lu SEE FDN SCH WHERE SAWCUT DOES NOT REACH. �' ¢ a > z O) �M°. . ui SEE FOR REINF, ILL! CIO Q c i NOTE , DN SG SAWCUT JOINT (SJ), 1. SIZE AND REINF VARIES. SEE FOUNDATION SCHEDULE. CONSTRUCTION JOINT I" 1 13/16" 3/8"x3" 2" 3 1/4" 3/4"x5" B/ CON( 11/4" 2 1/16" 1/2 ''x3 j 2 1/2" j 3 3/4" MONOLITHIC EDGE (ME) (CJ),�/S"x5 1/2" ANCHOR ROD DETAIL KEYED NOT TO SCALE A COLUMN AND BASE PLATE SCHEDULE 1'***B FOUNDATION SCHEDULE("C_�SLAB-ON-GRADE DETAILS (FOOT TRAFFIC PCS301 \P2v 1 PCS301 J MAISONRff WAIL BEAM SCHEDULE UL E NOMINAL REINFORCO N0 STIRRUPS MARK TYPE SIZE (W"xD") COMMENTS EOT MID TOP SIZE SPACING 551 1 Sx8 -- (2) #5 -- -- -- B52 2 8x16 (2) #5 -- (2) #5 -- -- 553 1 12x& -- (2) #5 -- -- -- 554 2 12x16 (2) #5 -- (2) *5 -- -- C51 3 EX24 (2)'r1 (2) #5 (2) #5 #3 10" OC T51 4 SX12 (2) #5 -- (2) #5 #3 48" OC T52 4 SX11 (2) #5 -- (2) #5 #3 40" OC d ;_.d • '. id f B 1 2 3 4 BEAM TYPES NOTES: I. MIN PB CAPACITY FOR THE INDICATED SPAN MUST BE VERIFIED BY THE PRECAST MFR AND DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED IN THE SUBMITTALS. 2 "BB" = BOND BEAM (COMPOSED OF KNOCK -OUT BLOCK) STD AG[ LAP TOP BARS VSO* HOOK MID - SPAN o , °a. d d .. A 211 MAX FOR BOTTOM BARS (TYP) BOTTOM BARS PROVIDE A GLASS (oil TENSION LAP CENTERED OVER SUPPORT OR MIN. " 4 TERMINATE BARS a ° AS CONDITION CLEAR WARRANTS. CLEAR 70, SPAN SPAN NOTES: 1. PLACEMENT OF REINF TO BE PER ACI 318. CONCRETE BEAM REINFORCING DIAGRAM SCH-FTG(2000PSF) FOOUNDA MN SCHEDULE MARK SIZE (L Y, W x D) REINFORCING REMARKS F46 4'-6" x 4'-6" x P-2" (5) #5 EA WAY, BOT PAD FOOTING F50 5'-0" x 5'-0" x 1'-2" (5) #5 EA WAY, BOT PAD FOOTING F56 5'-6" x 5'-6" x 1'-2" (5) 05 EA WAY, BOT PAD FOOTING F0060 0'-0" x 6'-O" x 1'-2" (0) 05 SW, (6) 05 LW, BOT PAD FOOTING F11O8O 11'-O" x 8'-O" x 1'-2" (11) #5 SW, (S) 05 LW, BOT PAD FOOTING F110g0 j 11'-O" x 9'-O" x 1'-2" 01) #5 SW, (9) 05 LW, BOT PAD FOOTING F UNDD ATMN DD EM c' N NFOO RMATMN ASSUMED NET ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING PRESSURE, -- 2000 PSG SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION HAS NOT BEEN PERFORMED AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT WAS NOT AVAILABLE FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN. PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, THE OWNER SHALL RETAIN THE SERVICES OF A QUALIFIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER TO PERFORM 501L TEST BORINGS, PROVIDE RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN (INCLUD ING NET ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING PRESSURE), PROVIDE EARTHWORK COMPACTION GRITERIA, AND PERFORM SOIL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PERFORMING ALL EARTHWORK OPERATIONS IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THIS REPORT, IF THE FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS AND NET ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING GAPACITY DIFFER FROM THE ASSUMED VALUE, THEN MODIFIGATIONS TO THE DRAWINGS WILL BE REQUIRED. SHOULD THIS OCCUR, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL STOP CONSTRUCTION AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY. J W 0 m Z 3 E v �/^' o I� Uj Z N 0 3 0 E w U) LD 0o Z �0 J 0 QJZ Q ❑Jo X p W J°Z5�v Z - Q Y O W �cf) 0 0 LU Z o LL �YOwa = N a Cn 0 z 0 3 �Q o o m m P EE m_ 23 t m m O N N M 3 02 13 \\ (7,� /7 - I I� �I I I 4 0 OI I I a a NOTES: NOTE: 1. a = 12 Ft. ASDE 7-02 WALL DESIGN WIND PRESSURES AND SUCTIONS FOR MEAN ROOF HEIGHT s 00 f1I WIND PRESSURE ARID SUCTION (PSF) EFFECTIVE (¢) VALUE DENOTES PRESSURE WIND AREA H VALUE DENOTES SUCTION (SO FEET) ® 0 10 (+) 29.6 (+) 29.6 (-) 32.1 (-) 39.6 20 (+) 20.3 (+) 28.3 C-) 30.8 (-) 3-1.0 50 (+) 26.5 (+) 26.5 (-) 29.0 (-) 33.5 100 (+) 25.2 (+) 25.2 (-) 27.7 (-) 30.8 LU O; OHO` O�❑ ;O L----, - � 3 I 0 13 PLAN VI EW CHIP ROOF) NOTES: I .- to ri 'Ni`� �-�wr..i�r< '`"- I I y pf�' I F ' "'N"'2. A (Kd) OF 0.85 HAS BEEN USED IN THE NOR EXFANSION BOLTS TO BE JSED, DEVELOPMENT OF THESE VALUES. THE 2. ID (Kd) OF 0.85 HAS BEEN USED (N THE USE OF THESE VALUES SHALL ONLY BE DEVELOPMENT OF THESE VALUES. THE USE APPLIED WHEN USED IN CONJUNCTION OF THESE VALUES SHALL ONLY BE WITH LOAD COM INATIONS SPECIFIED IN APPLIED WHEN USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH Z 0 0 m m E 0 i B SECTIONS 2.3 & 2.4 OF A&CE 7-02. LOAD COMBINATIONS SPECIFIED IN F:407.645.3790 SECTIONS 2.3 AND 2.4 OF ASCE 7-02. 1912 Boothe Circle- Suite 100 Longwood, FL 32750 bbma.com \SCE • -02 GROSS UPLIFT DESIGN PRESSURES FOR GABLE/HIP ROOFS WITH ROOF SLOPE 7* - ®:� 270 (MRHI :s 501 10 e ROOF SLOPED GROSS UPLIFT EFFECTIVE PRESSURE (PSF) WIND AREA (SG FEET) ❑ O O 10 (-) 27.1 (-) 17.l (-) 1-1.1 20 (-) 26.3 (-) 15.6 (-) 15.6 50 (-) 25.3 (-) 13.6 (-) 13.6 100 (-) 24.6 (-) 12.0 ( 17J LATERAL DESIGN ORI RIA WIND VELOCITY: 11 IMPORTANCE FACTOR: 1. EXPOSURE CATEGORY: C INTERNAL PRESSURE 5T4, ALEMNGINEERCOEFFIGIENT: (ELF&FID) 0 0 0 Ch E U) x Z a CN w J W IX O I. Z rn o � a N ILL!I- ~ m O W Bora Erbilen P.E. #55996 SHALL BE THE SAME A& CORRESPONDING; ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS WALL ZONES 4 5. COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND P 1 DMASONRYDRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED CHANGED, A OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER J( O WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLEBROOKS ASSOCIATES". NOR ARE THEY TO BE 1 ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. File=F: \2007\07122\07122-TECH\07122_SDWGS\07122_Sdwgs\PUBLIX\07122_PCS301.dwg Tab=PCS301 Date/Time= Apr 17, 2008 - 10: 43am Plot by jbrower .i Publix Canopy Photometrics SCALE: 1/8" =1'-0" 0 0 0 15. 25.7 30.4 0 0 0 32.5 3.8 0 .5 34.4 0 0 34.3 35.2 33.5 0 0 0 0 33.5 34.5 33.3 33.2 29. 020. ® '44.1 ®'4 .8 .1 ® '49.1 ® 47.1 47 4I50.6 '47.5[39.5 042. 016. 030.2 035.3 037.6 03.0 .0 �39.8 �39.5 �40.8 38.4 38.5 �40.0 �38.4 �39.1 �35. O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O o O 2 ATM Photometrics SCALE: 1/8" =1'-0" Calculations DESCRIPTION AVG MAX MIN AVG/MIN MAXIMIN CANOPY 31.7 FC 52.1 FC 9.6 FC 3.3: 1 5.4 :1 ATM SECURITY 8.6 FC 39.2 FC 2.0 FC 4.3 :1 19.6 : 1 00 29.1 28.7 0 0 27.6 28.5 0 0 26.0 26.5 28.2 0 0 27.0 27.7 ® 044 7 041.8 [339.1 �400 45.3 �40.8 038.9 039.3 037.2 039.6 k5.0 036.3 039.3 "36.4 038.6 0 Luminaire Schedule SYMBOL LABEL QTY MANUF. CATALOG NUMBER DESCRIPTION LAMP MOUNTING LUMENS LLF WATTS KIM WD 18D4 400 W MH ED-28 RE: ELEVATIONS A 3 LIGHTING 40OMH WALL DIRECTOR CLEAR MOGUL BASE FOR MOUNTING 40,000 0.72 400 HEIGHT ON WALL a0 YY 2 GENERAL SBF10M1- SPOT LIGHT MXR100/U/MED WALL BRACKET 8,800 0.72 130 ELECTRIC NPEK120 @ 8'-0" AFF EE 38 PRESCO 1314M9- 175MHFE-MB- RECESSED MVR175/C/U FLUSH MOUNTED 12,000 0.72 175 LITE TLG/TRG-FSD-FA CANOPY LIGHT @ CEILING B 22 LURALINE HELOS HL302XL UWM DECORATIVE 100 WATT WALL MOUNTED @ T-6" TO BTM 7,000 0.72 100 - M100 / R SCONCE LIGHT METAL HALIDE SERIES OF FIXTURE 1. ONLY FIXTURES THAT ARE SHOWN ON PUBLIX 54.4 PROTOTYPE PLANS 4. ALL FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL HAVE ENERGY SHALL BE FURNISHED BY PUBLIX. ALL OTHER FIXTURES SHALL BE SAVING LAMPS AND BALLASTS. FURNISHED BY THE CANOPY CONTRACTOR, ALL OF THE FIXTURES SHALL BE INSTALLED BY THE CANOPY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 5. ALL FLOURESCENT / HID FIXTURES TO BE 120/208. 2. PROVIDE NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDWARE &ACCESSORIES FOR ALL 6. ALL EMERGENCY, EXIT AND NIGHT LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE FIXTURES. CONNECTED AHEAD OF LOCAL SWITCHES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. PROVIDE .125 MIN. THICK LENSES FOR ALL FLUORESCENT FIXTURES. 3 Publix Canopy Wiring SCALE: 1/8" = V-0" O 23.8 0 25.9 0 23.7 0 22.7 0 0 25.0 0 .6 0.3 0 21.4 0 20.6 0 19.6 0 20.5 0 1 .3 0 6.1 0 0 18.6 20.9 0 0 0 20.3 21.5 21.9 0 20.8 0 0 0 21.9 21.6 20.6 0 21.6 0 20.1 0 18. 0 0 21.8 24.0 0 0 25.3 27.9 0 1.0 0 37.9 0 37.4 0 33.9 0 0 37.8 35.2 ® 0 36.4 0 33.8 0 [3.2 0 1.3 0 37.8 0 35.0 0 32.1 0 37.1 0 3 .8 0 .6 0 0 31.8 37.4 0 32.9 0 0 37.1 38.2 0 33.4 0 0 38.3 37.3 0 33.3 0 38.2 0 33.9 0 29. 0 0 37.6 41.5 0 0 41.8 46.6 0 5.6 0 0 49.9 0 44.3 0 � P � ®0 P P 31.7 0 36.3 0 32.4 0 30.4 0 O 35.7 0 .1 0.8 38.8 0 35.9 O 32.9 38.5 0 3.7 0 5.2 0 32.8 38.8 O 33.8 0 38.2 39.5 0 34.4 O® O 0 39.6 38.4 34.2 39.7 0 34.8 0 30. 0® o 38.9 42.9 o 43.3 48.9 0 6.4 0 49.1 0 47.9 0 44.4 0 0 47.5 18.7 19.5 18.6 17.9 1 .8 9.3 �22.2 �21.6 �20.8 �22.1 �1 .4 7.0 �19.8 �22.5 �21.6 �23.0 �23.5 �22.2 �23.5 �23.1 �22.0 �23.2 �21.4 �20.1 �23.5 �26.0 �27.8 �31.8 7.6 �d �49.0 �44.1 �A,3 0 39.4 0 40.8 0 36.6 0® 0 41.3 O GFI 28.1 028.8 028.0 027.2 027.0 3.0 23.4 027.2 027.1 028.5 02 .0 02 .2 032.7 032.3 033.4 2.6 1.7 033.7 032.5 033.7 32.3 32.4 034.2 033.3 034.1 031.7 032.8 033.3 032.5 032. 38.7 [3043.3 �41.a3.7 � 3.7 35.0[ 14.4 �41.1 [3 .5 �4 .8 ® 46.0 ® � 6.5 c 44.,09.8 '46.0 ® 45.5 45EI50.6 '47.4 ® '44.3 13048.0 '46.DX. 37.2 040.5 039.0 037.3 037.7 0 0.4 131.4 '38.1 036.6 039.1 '3 .7 '3 .4 '38.5 '37.2 '38.7 7.6 L.3 039.0 037.3 '39.1 37.0 37.2 '39.7 038.3 '39.5 '36.2 '37.9 038.5 '37.3 '38.1 0 o■ 0 0 0 on 4 0 0 0 a r) 0 0 0 No a 0 0 0 0 0 0 SHADING INDICATES LIGHT IS ON THE EMERGENCY CIRCUIT, TYP o 7.4 13.8 0 17.4 0 12.8 0 7.5 0 5.9 0 .1 0 3.8 0 17.5 0 13.0 0 6.8 0 .5 0 2.1 0 2.0 0 2.5 0 3.3 0 3.7 3. 0 4.4 0 7.0 0 13.4 0 20.7 0 18. 0 10. 0 4.9 0 2.9 0 3.1 0 5.6 0 12.0 0 21.5 0 22.3 0 13.0 0 6.4 0 4.3 0 5.6 0 10.8 0 20.1 0 231 0 1 .1 0 6.4 12.8 1 1.5 I d o 0 110.9 23.Ei2.3 0 20.8 0 10.4 0 7.7 0 1.6 0 3.1 0 �2.6 0 21.7 0 9.8 0 0 2.8 0 3.1 0 4.9 0 7.1 0 8.2 7. 0 6.6 O 9.4 O 19.2 0 O 27. O 13. O 5.8 O 3.3 O 3.4 O 6.5 O 15.1 0 3� O 31.5 O 16.6 O 7.5 O 4.8 O 6.4 O 13.3 O 2#33 01f.6 1 .6 O 7.8 p3.2 010.3 '22.0 1 '29.0 019.4 010.0 07.4 0 1.0 1.4®029.2 020.2 09.4 0 .5 03.3 04.5 08.7 015.6 018.8 1 5 08.8 09.2 015.9 025.0 021. 011. 05.2 07.3 08.9 013.6 022.7 035.1 039.2 032.0 024. 018. 016.3 018.4 024.9 026 01 .8 08.6 0 1 0 66 0 0 439 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12.2 0 5.5 0 12.2 0 25.1133.0 0 1 .2 0 7.6 0 9.3 0 11.8 0 10. 0 3.6 0 6.7 0 8.4 0 12.4 25.6 29. 29.0 24.3 19.2 15.7 14.5 15.0 14.1 10.2 6.41 / 1 .2 0 13.0 0 11.1 0 22.4 0 27 .0 0 23.7 0 19.3 0 16.6 0 14.5 0 11.9 0 8.8 0 6.3 0 9.1 0 10.1 0 12.7 0 16.6 0 21.2 0 25.1 0 25.4 0 22.8 0 18.2 0 14.4 0 11.8 0 10.1 0 8.5 0 6.5 0 4.� -1-,- 5.2 5.9 --o^- 8.1 -- 7.6 °i- - -r 8.2 10.1 13.0 -�-r- 15.1 15.5;.4 O �\ 4.1 O 4.9 O 5.3 O 5.8 O 6.7 O 8.1 O 9.9 O 11.5 O 12.5 O 12.5 0 12.0 O 1 . 25.1 0 23.7 0 20.3 0 17.3 0 14.8 0 12.7 0 11.0 0 9.6 0 8.6 0 8.5 0 9.2 0 11.1 0 13.9 0 17.4 0 20.2 0 21.1 0 19.1 0 15.7 0 12.3 0 9.6 0 7.7 0 6.2 0 4.8 0/ A.6 11.5 13.3 11.7 a 9.9 o 3.5 0 4.0 0 4.8 0 5.7 0 6.8 0 8.2 0 9.5 0 10.5 0 11.0 0 10.7 0 10.0 0 9.6 0 9.7 0 18.7 0 16.0 0 16.6 0 15.8 0 14.1 0 12.2 0 10.6 0 9.2 0 8.4 0 8.0 0 7.9 0 8.3 0 9.6 0 11.8 0 14.0 0 15.8 0 16.3 0 15.1 0 12.8 0 10.2 0 7.8 0 6.2 0 5.1 0 4.2/ ,o 3.2 o 2.9 0 3.4 0 4.0 0 4,8 0 5.9 0 7.0 0 8.0 0 8.9 0 9.4 0 9.2 0 8.5 0 7.9 0 13.3 0 14.2 0 14.9 0 15.0 0 14.5 0 13.3 0 11.8 0 10.4 0 9.1 0 8.3 0 8.0 0 7.7 0 7.9 0 8.7 0 9.8 0 11.0 0 11.9 0 12.0 0 11.4 0 10.0 0 8.2 0 6.5 0 5.2 0 4.4 0 3.0 A� 6� \0 \2.6 0 2.9 0 3.4 0 4.2 0 5.0 0 5.9 0 6.7 0 7.4 0 7.7 0 7.6 0 7.1 0 10.5 0 10.9 0 11.2 0 11.6 0 11.7 0 11.4 0 10.8 0 10.0 0 9.0 0 8.0 0 7.2 0 6.9 0 6.9 0 7.2 0 7.6 0 7.9 0 8.5 0 8.9 0 8.7 0 8.4 0 7.5 0 6.4 0 5.4 0 4.6 0 3.8 93.1 0 2. 0 3.0 0 3.6 0 4.3 0 5.2 0 6.2 0 7.1 0 7.9 0 8.4 0 8.7 0 8.8 0 8.9 0 9.0 0 9.1 0 9.2 0 9.2 0 9.0 0 8.8 0 8.3 0 7.6 0 6.8 0 6.4 0 6.5 0 6.5 0 6.6 0 6.5 0 6.3 0 6.5 0 6.6 0 6.3 0 6.2 0 5.6 0 4.9 0 4.7 0 4.2 0 3.7 \ �2.8 0 3.3 0 3.8 0 4.5 0 5.2 0 5.8 0 6.4 0 6.9 0 7.3 0 7.4 0 7.4 0 7.4 0 7.3 0 7.4 0 7.4 0 7.2 0 7.0 0 6.7 0 6.2 0 6.1 0 6.3 0 6.6 0 6.4 0 6.1 0 5.7 0 5.3 0 5.3 0 5.1 0 4.8 0 4.7 0 4.5 0 4.2 0 4.1 0 4.0 / � 3.7 \ \ o 3.0 0 3.4 0 3.7 0 4.2 0 4.8 0 5.5 0 5.9 0 6.2 0 6.3 0 6.3 0 5.9 0 5.9 0 6.1 0 6.0 0 5.9 0 5.8 0 5.5 0 5.5 0 5.8 0 6.5 0 6.6 0 6.5 0 6.1 0 5.5 0 4.9 0 4.8 0 4.7 0 4.5 0 4.4 0 4.2 0 3.9 0 3.9 0 X%9 \ \ o 2.9 0 3.2 0 3.7 0 4.4 0 4.9 0 5.2 0 5.4 0 5.4 0 5.2 0 5.0 0 5.1 0 5.2 0 5.2 0 5.1 0 5.1 0 5.2 0 5.2 0 5.6 0 6.1 0 6.4 0 6.5 0 6.2 0 5.6 0 5.1 0 4.6 0 4.3 0 4.1 0 4.0 0 3.9 0 3.9 0 3/8/ � o 2.9 0 3.4 0 4.1 0 4.5 0 4.6 0 4.8 0 4.8 0 4.6 0 4.4 0 4.6 0 4.8 0 4.8 0 4.8 0 5.0 0 5.2 0 5.2 0 5.3 0 5.7 0 6.1 0 6.2 0 5.8 0 5.6 0 5.2 0 4.7 0 4.2 0 3.7 0 3.7 0 3.7 0 3y/ � o 3.4 0 3.8 0 4.1 0 4.3 0 4.5 0 4.4 0 4.4 0 4.3 0 4.3 0 4.4 0 4.6 0 4.7 0 4.9 0 5.2 0 5.3 0 5.3 0 5.4 0 5.5 0 5.5 0 5.3 0 5.2 0 4.9 0 4.4 0 3.9 0 3.5 0 3.3 0 3.2/ / \ 3.6 3.9 4.2 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.1 5.1 5.1 4.9 4.8 4.7 4.5 4.2 3.9 3.5 3.1 �'g� \ 0 �6 0 3.7 0 3.7 0 3.7 0 3.7 0 3.8 0 3.9 0 4.0 0 4.2 0 4.4 0 4.6 0 4.7 0 4.8 0 4.8 0 4.5 0 4.3 0 4.1 0 4.0 0 3.9 0 3.6 0 3.3 0 3.1 0 i i18 0 0 3.21-�3.2 0 3.3 0 3.4 0 3.5 0 3.6 0 3.7 0 3.8 0 4.0 0 4.2 0 4.3 0 4.2 0 4.2 0 4.0 0 3.7 0 3.5 0 3.5 0 3.4 0 3.1 0 �28 \ 0\ 2.9 0 __11 0 3.2 0 3.2 0 3.3 0 3.4 0 3.5 0 3.6 0 3.7 0 3.7 0 3.5 0 3.4 0 3.2 0 3.0 0 2.9,-2-6 0 -' o�- o 2.8 0-2.9- 0 0 -2 9 _ 3.0_ 0 3.1 0 _ 3_2 _ 0 3.1 0 o _3.Q - 2 8- g- 2.7 \vI PUBLIX CENTER CENTER GRID OF "YY" OF "YY" LINE FIXTURE FIXTURE 5� 14'-11 15'-8%" I PUBLIX i GRID O 0 2 O 6 l O 5 I O 5 LINE 1 WP GFI J J J m CENTER J J OF 'W" - - - FIXTURE m m m CENTER LIGHT ON PILASTER TO RIGHT (SHOWN OFFSET FOR CLARITY). MOUNTING HEIGHT = 20'-0" CENTER LIGHT ON PILASTER TO LEFT (SHOWN OFFSET FOR CLARITY). MOUNTING HEIGHT=17'-0" GENERAL NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE EXACT MOUNTING AND LOCATION OF ALL FIXTURES WITH THE PUBLIX FIELD REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. 2. THE LOCATIONS AND ROUTING OF CONDUIT SHOWN ON THIS PLAN ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. THE EXACT LOCATION & ROUTING OF ALL CONDUITAND WIRING SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND COORDINATED WITH THE PUBLIX REP. CENTER LIGHT BETWEEN PILASTERS MOUNTING HEIGHT=14'-0" O RE: PUBLIX ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL CIRCUITING 20 VERIFY USE OF ALL SIGNS WITH SITE FACADE AND COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF SIGN J.B.AND LED TRANSFORMER WITH PUBLIX REP. (TYR) O PRESTO SIGN BY PUBLIX TO BE ON 24 HRS PER DAY (VERIFY LOCATION) CONTRACTOR TO MOUNT JB ABOVE CEILING AND STUB OUT FEED FOR PRESTO SIGN AT T-0" AFF (TYP) SHADING INDICATES LIGHT IS ON THE EMERGENCY CIRCUIT, TYP ® PHOTO CELL SUPPLIED WITH FIXTURE TO CONTROL CIRCUIT. RE: PUBLIX ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR CIRCUITING (MTD ON PARAPET WALL) O5 IF THE CEILING IS HIGHER THAN 11'-0", FLUSH MOUNT THE J-BOX IN THE WALL AT 10'-0" AFF. IF THE CEILING IS 11'-0" OR LOWER, FLUSH MOUNT THE J-BOX IN THE CEILING 2'-0" FROM THE WALL. IN BOTH CASES, WHEN POSSIBLE, INSTALL THE J-BOX 12'-0" FROM THE ATM MACHINE OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE STORE ENTRANCE. 0�� 32.0 32.1 30.3 25 1 .9 ® 046.5 '4 0�39 2 '2 .6 0� 37.1 �37.3 35.1 �30 �1 .9 0 0 0 0 0 © INSTALL (1)1-GANG J-BOX WITH PLASTER RING AND 1/2" C WITH PULL STRING TO COMM A (+48" A.F.F.) 7o CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 3/4" SLEEVE AND LB WITH 3/4" C TO JOIST SPACE (TYP FOR ALL EXTERIOR MTD DEVICES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). COORDINATE KNOX BOX MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH LOCAL A.H.J. ® OUTDOOR BURGLARY SIREN (ADT). REFER TO PUBLIX DWGS FOR SECURITY SYSTEM INFORMATION. F 2 0 0 d z W z 0 O�/ w 0 Uw -J00Z w0m- �Q�LL > L.L. w Man J U VJ J J_ T� L.L W Nx W �U) VJ 0 �o M C0 ILL <06JzJ w J�=0 Z m�=0 LLI ^�^Ow Q o Na a CU U _(1) Uj Q ca U X w J F w w Q oC-4 �LL O H ~ Z Z O O CO W S m OU m w X X X L m m m m Z) a a O W 7 N O N " CI w O C C N N N N J w Ce O cD Z m Q LU 0 c) Z w J C7 W w m CD PCE101